patch 8.1.1350: "W" for wrapping not shown when more than 99 matches

Problem:    "W" for wrapping not shown when more than 99 matches.
Solution:   Adjust check for length. (Masato Nishihata, closes #4388)

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/bug_report.md

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+---
+name: Bug report
+about: Create a report to help us improve Vim
+title: ''
+labels: ''
+
+---
+
+_Instructions: Replace the template text and remove irrelevant text (including this line)_
+
+**Describe the bug**
+A clear and concise description of what the bug is.
+(Issues related to the runtime files should be reported to their maintainer, check the file header.)
+
+**To Reproduce**
+Detailed steps to reproduce the behavior:
+1. Run `vim --clean` (or `gvim --clean`, etc.)
+2. Edit `filename`
+3. Type '....'
+4. Describe the error
+
+**Expected behavior**
+A clear and concise description of what you expected to happen.
+
+**Screenshots**
+If applicable, copy/paste the text or add screenshots to help explain your problem.
+
+**Environment (please complete the following information):**
+ - Vim version [e.g. 8.1.1234] (Or paste the result of `vim --version`.)
+ - OS: [e.g. Ubuntu 18.04, Windows 10 1809, macOS 10.14]
+ - Terminal: [e.g. GNOME Terminal, mintty, iTerm2, tmux, GNU screen] (Use GUI if you use the GUI.)
+
+**Additional context**
+Add any other context about the problem here.

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/feature_request.md

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+---
+name: Feature request
+about: Suggest an enhancement for Vim
+title: ''
+labels: enhancement
+
+---
+
+_Instructions: Replace the template text and remove irrelevant text (including this line)_
+
+**Is your feature request related something that is currently hard to do? Please describe.**
+A clear and concise description of what is hard to do. Ex. It is difficult to [...] when [...]
+(If it is related to runtime files, please check their header for where to discuss enhancements.)
+
+**Describe the solution you'd like**
+A clear and concise description of what you want to happen.
+
+**Describe alternatives you've considered**
+A clear and concise description of any alternative solutions or features you've considered.
+
+**Additional context**
+Add any other context or screenshots about the feature request here.

.gitignore

@@ -6,16 +6,15 @@ src/auto/if_perl.c
 src/auto/gui_gtk_gresources.c
 src/auto/gui_gtk_gresources.h
 src/objects/.dirstamp
+src/objects
 src/tags
 
 # We do need src/auto/configure.
-src/auto/config.aap
 src/auto/config.cache
 src/auto/config.h
 src/auto/config.log
 src/auto/config.mk
 src/auto/config.status
-src/auto/configure.aap
 src/auto/osdef.h
 src/auto/link.log
 src/auto/link.sed
@@ -26,6 +25,7 @@ src/auto/pathdef.c
 *.idb
 *.manifest
 *.exp
+*.map
 *.obj
 *.pdb
 *.ilk
@@ -33,22 +33,15 @@ src/auto/pathdef.c
 *.suo
 *.res
 *.RES
-src/if_perl.c
+vim*.dll
+vim*.lib
 src/pathdef.c
 src/Obj*/pathdef.c
 gvimext.dll
 gvimext.lib
 gvim.lib
 runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
-
+nsis/icons/*
-# Borland C++
-bcc.cfg
-*.ilc
-*.ild
-*.ilf
-*.ils
-*.map
-*.tds
 
 # NetBeans
 nbproject/*
@@ -68,6 +61,7 @@ src/po/vim.pot
 
 # Generated by "make test"
 src/po/*.ck
+src/po/*.desktop
 src/testdir/mbyte.vim
 src/testdir/mzscheme.vim
 src/testdir/lua.vim
@@ -85,3 +79,16 @@ src/memfile_test
 src/json_test
 src/message_test
 src/kword_test
+
+# Generated by "make install"
+runtime/doc/tags
+
+# Generated by "make shadow".  The directory names could be anything but we
+# restrict them to shadow (the default) or shadow-*
+src/shadow
+src/shadow-*
+src/runtime
+src/pixmaps
+
+# other possible files build by tools
+src/cscope.out

.hgignore

@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+syntax: glob
+
+# Unixen: object and executable files.
+*.o
+src/vim
+src/xxd/xxd
+src/auto/if_perl.c
+src/auto/gui_gtk_gresources.c
+src/auto/gui_gtk_gresources.h
+src/objects/.dirstamp
+src/objects
+src/tags
+
+# We do need src/auto/configure.
+src/auto/config.cache
+src/auto/config.h
+src/auto/config.log
+src/auto/config.mk
+src/auto/config.status
+src/auto/osdef.h
+src/auto/link.log
+src/auto/link.sed
+src/auto/pathdef.c
+
+# Windows
+*.exe
+*.idb
+*.manifest
+*.exp
+*.map
+*.obj
+*.pdb
+*.ilk
+*.sln
+*.suo
+*.res
+*.RES
+vim*.dll
+vim*.lib
+src/pathdef.c
+src/Obj*/pathdef.c
+gvimext.dll
+gvimext.lib
+gvim.lib
+runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
+nsis/icons/*
+
+# NetBeans
+nbproject/*
+
+# Mac OSX
+src/xxd/xxd.dSYM
+
+# All platforms
+*.rej
+*.orig
+*.mo
+*.swp
+*~
+*.pyc
+*.log
+src/po/vim.pot
+
+# Generated by "make test"
+src/po/*.ck
+src/po/*.desktop
+src/testdir/mbyte.vim
+src/testdir/mzscheme.vim
+src/testdir/lua.vim
+src/testdir/small.vim
+src/testdir/tiny.vim
+src/testdir/test*.out
+src/testdir/test*.failed
+src/testdir/test.log
+src/testdir/dostmp/*
+src/testdir/messages
+src/testdir/viminfo
+src/testdir/opt_test.vim
+runtime/indent/testdir/*.out
+src/memfile_test
+src/json_test
+src/message_test
+src/kword_test
+
+# Generated by "make install"
+runtime/doc/tags
+
+# Generated by "make shadow".  The directory names could be anything but we
+# restrict them to shadow (the default) or shadow-*
+src/shadow
+src/shadow-*
+src/runtime
+src/pixmaps
+
+# other possible files build by tools
+src/cscope.out

.travis.yml

@@ -69,10 +69,14 @@ branches:
 
 addons:
   apt:
+    sources:
+      # Need msgfmt 0.19.8 to be able to generate .desktop files
+      - sourceline: 'ppa:ricotz/toolchain'
     packages:
       - autoconf
       - clang
       - lcov
+      - gettext
       - libperl-dev
       - python-dev
       - python3-dev
@@ -126,6 +130,8 @@ before_script:
 
 script:
   - NPROC=$(getconf _NPROCESSORS_ONLN)
+  - set -o errexit
+  - echo -e "\\033[33;1mConfiguring Vim\\033[0m" && echo -en "travis_fold:start:configure\\r\\033[0K"
   - |
     if [[ "${CHECK_AUTOCONF}" = "yes" ]] && [[ "${CC}" = "gcc" ]]; then
       make -C src autoconf
@@ -134,13 +140,17 @@ script:
     if [[ -n "${SHADOWOPT}" ]]; then
       make -C src shadow
     fi
+  # "./configure" changes its working directory into "$SRCDIR".
+  - ./configure --with-features=${FEATURES} ${CONFOPT} --enable-fail-if-missing
+  - echo -en "travis_fold:end:configure\\r\\033[0K"
+  - echo -e "\\033[33;1mBuilding Vim\\033[0m" && echo -en "travis_fold:start:build\\r\\033[0K"
   - |
-    (
+    if [[ "${BUILD}" = "yes" ]]; then
-    cd "${SRCDIR}" \
-      && ./configure --with-features=${FEATURES} ${CONFOPT} --enable-fail-if-missing
-    ) && if [[ "${BUILD}" = "yes" ]]; then
       make ${SHADOWOPT} -j${NPROC}
     fi
+  - echo -en "travis_fold:end:build\\r\\033[0K"
+  - set +o errexit
+  - echo -e "\\033[33;1mTesting Vim\\033[0m" && echo -en "travis_fold:start:test\\r\\033[0K"
   # Show Vim version and also if_xx versions.
   - |
     if [[ "${BUILD}" = "yes" ]]; then
@@ -150,12 +160,13 @@ script:
       cat if_ver.txt
     fi
   - make ${SHADOWOPT} ${TEST}
+  - echo -en "travis_fold:end:test\\r\\033[0K"
   - |
     if [[ -n "${ASAN_OPTIONS}" ]]; then
       while read log; do
         asan_symbolize < "${log}"
+        false # exit 1 if there are ASAN logs
       done < <(find . -type f -name 'asan.*' -size +0)
-      [[ -z "${log}" ]] # exit 1 if there are ASAN logs
     fi
 
 after_success:

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -21,9 +21,9 @@ maillist is also fine.
 
 Please use the GitHub issues only for actual issues. If you are not 100% sure
 that your problem is a Vim issue, please first discuss this on the Vim user
-maillist.  Try reproducing the problem without any plugins or settings:
+maillist.  Try reproducing the problem without any of your plugins or settings:
 
-    vim -N -u NONE
+    vim --clean
 
 If you report an issue, please describe exactly how to reproduce it.
 For example, don't say "insert some text" but say what you did exactly:
@@ -56,12 +56,14 @@ If the maintainer does not respond, contact the vim-dev maillist.
 
 # Translations
 
-Translating messages and runtime files is very much appreciated!  These things can be translated:
+Translating messages and runtime files is very much appreciated!  These things
+can be translated:
 *   Messages in Vim, see [src/po/README.txt][1]
+    Also used for the desktop icons.
 *   Menus, see [runtime/lang/README.txt][2]
 *   Vim tutor, see [runtime/tutor/README.txt][3]
 *   Manual pages, see [runtime/doc/\*.1][4] for examples
-*   Desktop icon, see [runtime/vim.desktop][5] and [runtime/gvim.desktop][6]
+*   Installer, see [nsis/lang/\*.nsi][5] for examples
 
 The help files can be translated and made available separately.
 See https://www.vim.org/translations.php for examples.
@@ -70,5 +72,4 @@ See https://www.vim.org/translations.php for examples.
 [2]: https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/runtime/lang/README.txt
 [3]: https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/runtime/tutor/README.txt
 [4]: https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/runtime/doc/vim.1
-[5]: https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/runtime/vim.desktop
+[5]: https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/nsis/lang/english.nsi
-[6]: https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/runtime/gvim.desktop

Filelist

@@ -3,16 +3,16 @@
 
 # source files for all source archives
 SRC_ALL =	\
+		.gitignore \
 		.hgignore \
 		.lgtm.yml \
 		.travis.yml \
 		appveyor.yml \
 		ci/appveyor.bat \
 		src/Make_all.mak \
-		src/README.txt \
+		src/README.md \
 		src/alloc.h \
 		src/arabic.c \
-		src/arabic.h \
 		src/ascii.h \
 		src/autocmd.c \
 		src/beval.c \
@@ -20,10 +20,12 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/blob.c \
 		src/blowfish.c \
 		src/buffer.c \
+		src/change.c \
 		src/channel.c \
 		src/charset.c \
 		src/crypt.c \
 		src/crypt_zip.c \
+		src/debugger.c \
 		src/dict.c \
 		src/diff.c \
 		src/digraph.c \
@@ -49,6 +51,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/hardcopy.c \
 		src/hashtab.c \
 		src/indent.c \
+		src/insexpand.c \
 		src/json.c \
 		src/json_test.c \
 		src/kword_test.c \
@@ -97,6 +100,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/textprop.c \
 		src/ui.c \
 		src/undo.c \
+		src/usercmd.c \
 		src/userfunc.c \
 		src/version.c \
 		src/version.h \
@@ -152,10 +156,12 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/blob.pro \
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
+		src/proto/change.pro \
 		src/proto/channel.pro \
 		src/proto/charset.pro \
 		src/proto/crypt.pro \
 		src/proto/crypt_zip.pro \
+		src/proto/debugger.pro \
 		src/proto/dict.pro \
 		src/proto/diff.pro \
 		src/proto/digraph.pro \
@@ -176,6 +182,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/hardcopy.pro \
 		src/proto/hashtab.pro \
 		src/proto/indent.pro \
+		src/proto/insexpand.pro \
 		src/proto/json.pro \
 		src/proto/list.pro \
 		src/proto/main.pro \
@@ -209,6 +216,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/textprop.pro \
 		src/proto/ui.pro \
 		src/proto/undo.pro \
+		src/proto/usercmd.pro \
 		src/proto/userfunc.pro \
 		src/proto/version.pro \
 		src/proto/winclip.pro \
@@ -415,11 +423,8 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/GvimExt/uninst.bat \
 		README_srcdos.txt \
 		src/INSTALLpc.txt \
-		src/Make_bc5.mak \
 		src/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/Make_cyg_ming.mak \
-		src/Make_ivc.mak \
-		src/Make_dvc.mak \
 		src/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/Make_mvc.mak \
 		tools/rename.bat \
@@ -470,7 +475,6 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/xpm_w32.c \
 		src/xpm_w32.h \
 		src/tee/Make_mvc.mak \
-		src/xxd/Make_bc5.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_mvc.mak \
 		nsis/gvim.nsi \
@@ -508,13 +512,14 @@ SRC_DOS_BIN =	\
 		src/vim.tlb \
 		src/xpm/COPYRIGHT \
 		src/xpm/README.txt \
+		src/xpm/arm64/lib-vc14/libXpm.lib \
 		src/xpm/include/*.h \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib-vc14/libXpm.lib \
 		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.a \
 		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.lib \
-		src/xpm/x64/lib-vc14/libXpm.lib \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib-vc14/libXpm.lib \
 		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.a \
 		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.lib \
-		src/xpm/x86/lib-vc14/libXpm.lib \
 		nsis/icons.zip \
 
 # source files for Amiga, DOS, etc. (also in the extra archive)
@@ -936,6 +941,8 @@ LANG_SRC = \
 		src/po/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/po/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/po/Make_mvc.mak \
+		src/po/vim.desktop.in \
+		src/po/gvim.desktop.in \
 		src/po/sjiscorr.c \
 		src/po/*.po \
 

Makefile

@@ -43,13 +43,18 @@ all install uninstall tools config configure reconfig proto depend lint tags typ
 	@if test "$@" = "test"; then \
 		$(MAKE) indenttest; \
 	fi
+	@# When the target is "clean" also clean for the indent tests.
+	@if test "$@" = "clean" -o "$@" = "distclean" -o "$@" = "testclean"; then \
+		cd runtime/indent && \
+			$(MAKE) clean; \
+	fi
 
 # Executable used for running the indent tests.
 VIM_FOR_INDENTTEST = ../../src/vim
 
 indenttest:
 	cd runtime/indent && \
-		$(MAKE) clean VIM="$(VIM_FOR_INDENTTEST)" && \
+		$(MAKE) clean && \
 		$(MAKE) test VIM="$(VIM_FOR_INDENTTEST)"
 		
 

configure

@@ -3,4 +3,4 @@
 # This is just a stub for the Unix configure script, to provide support for
 # doing "./configure" in the top Vim directory.
 
-cd src && exec ./configure "$@"
+cd "${SRCDIR:-src}" && exec ./configure "$@"

nsis/gvim.nsi

@@ -173,6 +173,16 @@ Page custom SetCustom ValidateCustom
     !include "lang\tradchinese.nsi"
 !endif
 
+##########################################################
+# Version resources
+
+VIAddVersionKey /LANG=${LANG_ENGLISH} "ProductName" "Vim"
+VIAddVersionKey /LANG=${LANG_ENGLISH} "CompanyName" "Vim Developers"
+VIAddVersionKey /LANG=${LANG_ENGLISH} "LegalTrademarks" "Vim"
+VIAddVersionKey /LANG=${LANG_ENGLISH} "LegalCopyright" "Copyright (C) 1996"
+VIAddVersionKey /LANG=${LANG_ENGLISH} "FileDescription" "Vi Improved - A Text Editor"
+VIAddVersionKey /LANG=${LANG_ENGLISH} "FileVersion" "${VER_MAJOR}.${VER_MINOR}.0.0"
+VIProductVersion "${VER_MAJOR}.${VER_MINOR}.0.0"
 
 # Global variables
 Var vim_dialog
@@ -322,6 +332,9 @@ Section "$(str_section_exe)" id_section_exe
 
 	SetOutPath $0
 	File /oname=gvim.exe ${VIMSRC}\gvim_ole.exe
+!if /FileExists "${VIMSRC}\vim${BIT}.dll"
+	File ${VIMSRC}\vim${BIT}.dll
+!endif
 	File /oname=install.exe ${VIMSRC}\installw32.exe
 	File /oname=uninstal.exe ${VIMSRC}\uninstalw32.exe
 	File ${VIMSRC}\vimrun.exe
@@ -354,42 +367,10 @@ Section "$(str_section_exe)" id_section_exe
 	File ${VIMRT}\indent\*.*
 
 	SetOutPath $0\macros
-	File ${VIMRT}\macros\*.*
+	File /r ${VIMRT}\macros\*.*
-	SetOutPath $0\macros\hanoi
-	File ${VIMRT}\macros\hanoi\*.*
-	SetOutPath $0\macros\life
-	File ${VIMRT}\macros\life\*.*
-	SetOutPath $0\macros\maze
-	File ${VIMRT}\macros\maze\*.*
-	SetOutPath $0\macros\urm
-	File ${VIMRT}\macros\urm\*.*
 
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak
+	SetOutPath $0\pack
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak\*.*
+	File /r ${VIMRT}\pack\*.*
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\plugin
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\plugin\*.*
-
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\editexisting\plugin
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\editexisting\plugin\*.*
-
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\justify\plugin
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\justify\plugin\*.*
-
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\matchit\doc
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\matchit\doc\*.*
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\matchit\plugin
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\matchit\plugin\*.*
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\matchit\autoload
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\matchit\autoload\*.*
-
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\shellmenu\plugin
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\shellmenu\plugin\*.*
-
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\swapmouse\plugin
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\swapmouse\plugin\*.*
-
-	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\termdebug\plugin
-	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\termdebug\plugin\*.*
 
 	SetOutPath $0\plugin
 	File ${VIMRT}\plugin\*.*
@@ -1128,7 +1109,9 @@ Section "un.$(str_unsection_rootdir)" id_unsection_rootdir
 	Call un.GetParent
 	Pop $0
 
-	Delete $0\_vimrc
+	${IfNot} ${Silent}
+	  Delete $0\_vimrc
+	${Endif}
 	RMDir $0
 SectionEnd
 

runtime/autoload/dist/ft.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim functions for file type detection
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2019 Jan 18
+" Last Change:	2019 Mar 08
 
 " These functions are moved here from runtime/filetype.vim to make startup
 " faster.
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ func dist#ft#FTe()
     exe 'setf ' . g:filetype_euphoria
   else
     let n = 1
-    while n < 100 && n < line("$")
+    while n < 100 && n <= line("$")
       if getline(n) =~ "^\\s*\\(<'\\|'>\\)\\s*$"
 	setf specman
 	return
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ endfunc
 " Distinguish between HTML, XHTML and Django
 func dist#ft#FThtml()
   let n = 1
-  while n < 10 && n < line("$")
+  while n < 10 && n <= line("$")
     if getline(n) =~ '\<DTD\s\+XHTML\s'
       setf xhtml
       return
@@ -222,13 +222,13 @@ func dist#ft#FThtml()
     endif
     let n = n + 1
   endwhile
-  setf html
+  setf FALLBACK html
 endfunc
 
 " Distinguish between standard IDL and MS-IDL
 func dist#ft#FTidl()
   let n = 1
-  while n < 50 && n < line("$")
+  while n < 50 && n <= line("$")
     if getline(n) =~ '^\s*import\s\+"\(unknwn\|objidl\)\.idl"'
       setf msidl
       return
@@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ endfunc
 
 func dist#ft#FTxml()
   let n = 1
-  while n < 100 && n < line("$")
+  while n < 100 && n <= line("$")
     let line = getline(n)
     " DocBook 4 or DocBook 5.
     let is_docbook4 = line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*DocBook'
@@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ endfunc
 
 func dist#ft#FTy()
   let n = 1
-  while n < 100 && n < line("$")
+  while n < 100 && n <= line("$")
     let line = getline(n)
     if line =~ '^\s*%'
       setf yacc

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -83,6 +83,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	pi_tar.txt \
 	pi_vimball.txt \
 	pi_zip.txt \
+	popup.txt \
 	print.txt \
 	quickfix.txt \
 	quickref.txt \
@@ -220,6 +221,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	pi_tar.html \
 	pi_vimball.html \
 	pi_zip.html \
+	popup.html \
 	print.html \
 	quickfix.html \
 	quickref.html \

runtime/doc/arabic.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*arabic.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2010 Nov 13
+*arabic.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Nadim Shaikli
@@ -6,7 +6,6 @@
 
 Arabic Language support (options & mappings) for Vim		*Arabic*
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 								*E800*
 In order to use right-to-left and Arabic mapping support, it is

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 19
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -20,7 +20,6 @@ For a basic explanation, see section |40.3| in the user manual.
 10. Using autocommands		|autocmd-use|
 11. Disabling autocommands	|autocmd-disable|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Introduction						*autocmd-intro*
@@ -52,7 +51,7 @@ effects.  Be careful not to destroy your text.
 2. Defining autocommands				*autocmd-define*
 
 							*:au* *:autocmd*
-:au[tocmd] [group] {event} {pat} [nested] {cmd}
+:au[tocmd] [group] {event} {pat} [++once] [++nested] {cmd}
 			Add {cmd} to the list of commands that Vim will
 			execute automatically on {event} for a file matching
 			{pat} |autocmd-patterns|.
@@ -60,7 +59,13 @@ effects.  Be careful not to destroy your text.
 			:autocmd and won't start a comment.
 			Vim always adds the {cmd} after existing autocommands,
 			so that the autocommands execute in the order in which
-			they were given.  See |autocmd-nested| for [nested].
+			they were given.
+			See |autocmd-nested| for [++nested].  "nested"
+			(without the ++) can also be used, for backwards
+			compatibility.
+							*autocmd-once*
+			If [++once] is supplied the command is executed once,
+			then removed ("one shot").
 
 The special pattern <buffer> or <buffer=N> defines a buffer-local autocommand.
 See |autocmd-buflocal|.
@@ -128,10 +133,11 @@ prompt.  When one command outputs two messages this can happen anyway.
 ==============================================================================
 3. Removing autocommands				*autocmd-remove*
 
-:au[tocmd]! [group] {event} {pat} [nested] {cmd}
+:au[tocmd]! [group] {event} {pat} [++once] [++nested] {cmd}
 			Remove all autocommands associated with {event} and
-			{pat}, and add the command {cmd}.  See
+			{pat}, and add the command {cmd}.
-			|autocmd-nested| for [nested].
+			See |autocmd-once| for [++once].
+			See |autocmd-nested| for [++nested].
 
 :au[tocmd]! [group] {event} {pat}
 			Remove all autocommands associated with {event} and
@@ -360,6 +366,7 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |SessionLoadPost|	after loading a session file
 
 |MenuPopup|		just before showing the popup menu
+|CompleteChanged|	after Insert mode completion menu changed
 |CompleteDone|		after Insert mode completion is done
 
 |User|			to be used in combination with ":doautocmd"
@@ -572,7 +579,22 @@ ColorScheme			After loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|
 ColorSchemePre			Before loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|
 				Useful to setup removing things added by a
 				color scheme, before another one is loaded.
+CompleteChanged 					*CompleteChanged*
+				After each time the Insert mode completion
+				menu changed.  Not fired on popup menu hide,
+				use |CompleteDone| for that.  Never triggered
+				recursively.
 
+				Sets these |v:event| keys:
+				    completed_item	See |complete-items|.
+				    height		nr of items visible
+				    width		screen cells
+				    row			top screen row
+				    col			leftmost screen column
+				    size		total nr of items
+				    scrollbar		TRUE if visible
+
+				It is not allowed to change the text |textlock|.
 							*CompleteDone*
 CompleteDone			After Insert mode completion is done.  Either
 				when something was completed or abandoning
@@ -621,6 +643,8 @@ CursorMoved			After the cursor was moved in Normal or Visual
 				Not triggered when there is typeahead or when
 				an operator is pending.
 				For an example see |match-parens|.
+				Note: This can not be skipped with
+				`:noautocmd`.
 				Careful: This is triggered very often, don't
 				do anything that the user does not expect or
 				that is slow.
@@ -665,13 +689,14 @@ DiffUpdated			After diffs have been updated.  Depending on
 				change or when doing |:diffupdate|.
 							*DirChanged*
 DirChanged			The working directory has changed in response
-				to the |:cd| or |:lcd| commands, or as a
+				to the |:cd| or |:tcd| or |:lcd| commands, or
-				result of the 'autochdir' option.
+				as a result of the 'autochdir' option.
 				The pattern can be:
-					"window" to trigger on `:lcd`
+					"window"  to trigger on `:lcd`
-					"global" to trigger on `:cd`
+					"tabpage" to trigger on `:tcd`
-					"auto"   to trigger on 'autochdir'.
+					"global"  to trigger on `:cd`
-					"drop"	 to trigger on editing a file
+					"auto"    to trigger on 'autochdir'.
+					"drop"	  to trigger on editing a file
 				<afile> is set to the new directory name.
 							*ExitPre*
 ExitPre				When using `:quit`, `:wq` in a way it makes
@@ -870,7 +895,6 @@ OptionSet			After setting an option.  The pattern is
 
 				When using |:set| in the autocommand the event
 				is not triggered again.
-
 							*QuickFixCmdPre*
 QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 				|:lmake|, |:grep|, |:lgrep|, |:grepadd|,
@@ -1024,6 +1048,8 @@ TextChanged			After a change was made to the text in the
 				was defined).
 				Not triggered when there is typeahead or when
 				an operator is pending.
+				Note: This can not be skipped with
+				`:noautocmd`.
 				Careful: This is triggered very often, don't
 				do anything that the user does not expect or
 				that is slow.
@@ -1465,11 +1491,11 @@ If you want the buffer to be unmodified after changing it, reset the
 instead of ":q!".
 
 							*autocmd-nested* *E218*
-By default, autocommands do not nest.  If you use ":e" or ":w" in an
+By default, autocommands do not nest.  For example, if you use ":e" or ":w" in
-autocommand, Vim does not execute the BufRead and BufWrite autocommands for
+an autocommand, Vim does not execute the BufRead and BufWrite autocommands for
 those commands.  If you do want this, use the "nested" flag for those commands
 in which you want nesting.  For example: >
-  :autocmd FileChangedShell *.c nested e!
+  :autocmd FileChangedShell *.c ++nested e!
 The nesting is limited to 10 levels to get out of recursive loops.
 
 It's possible to use the ":au" command in an autocommand.  This can be a
@@ -1612,5 +1638,8 @@ following command.  Example: >
 This will write the file without triggering the autocommands defined by the
 gzip plugin.
 
+Note that some autocommands are not triggered right away, but only later.
+This specifically applies to |CursorMoved| and |TextChanged|.
+
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 05
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 			deletes the last character of the count.
 			See |:fixdel| if the <Del> key does not do what you
 			want.  See |'whichwrap'| for deleting a line break
-			(join lines).  {Vi does not support <Del>}
+			(join lines).
 
 							*X* *dh*
 ["x]X			Delete [count] characters before the cursor [into
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 {Visual}["x]x	or					*v_x* *v_d* *v_<Del>*
 {Visual}["x]d   or
 {Visual}["x]<Del>	Delete the highlighted text [into register x] (for
-			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not in Vi}
+			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
 
 {Visual}["x]CTRL-H   or					*v_CTRL-H* *v_<BS>*
 {Visual}["x]<BS>	When in Select mode: Delete the highlighted text [into
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 {Visual}["x]D		Delete the highlighted lines [into register x] (for
 			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  In Visual block mode,
 			"D" deletes the highlighted text plus all text until
-			the end of the line.  {not in Vi}
+			the end of the line.
 
 					*:d* *:de* *:del* *:delete* *:dl* *:dp*
 :[range]d[elete] [x]	Delete [range] lines (default: current line) [into
@@ -116,16 +116,15 @@ J			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 							*v_J*
 {Visual}J		Join the highlighted lines, with a minimum of two
 			lines.  Remove the indent and insert up to two spaces
-			(see below).  {not in Vi}
+			(see below).
 
 							*gJ*
 gJ			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
-			Don't insert or remove any spaces.  {not in Vi}
+			Don't insert or remove any spaces.
 
 							*v_gJ*
 {Visual}gJ		Join the highlighted lines, with a minimum of two
-			lines.  Don't insert or remove any spaces.  {not in
+			lines.  Don't insert or remove any spaces.
-			Vi}
 
 							*:j* *:join*
 :[range]j[oin][!] [flags]
@@ -134,7 +133,6 @@ gJ			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			If a [range] has equal start and end values, this
 			command does nothing.  The default behavior is to
 			join the current line with the line below it.
-			{not in Vi: !}
 			See |ex-flags| for [flags].
 
 :[range]j[oin][!] {count} [flags]
@@ -142,7 +140,6 @@ gJ			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			current line |cmdline-ranges|).  Same as "J", except
 			with [!] the join does not insert or delete any
 			spaces.
-			{not in Vi: !}
 			See |ex-flags| for [flags].
 
 These commands delete the <EOL> between lines.  This has the effect of joining
@@ -209,8 +206,7 @@ gR			Enter Virtual Replace mode: Each character you type
 
 {Visual}["x]c	or					*v_c* *v_s*
 {Visual}["x]s		Delete the highlighted text [into register x] and
-			start insert (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not
+			start insert (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
-			in Vi}
 
 							*v_r*
 {Visual}["x]r{char}	Replace all selected characters by {char}.
@@ -218,14 +214,13 @@ gR			Enter Virtual Replace mode: Each character you type
 							*v_C*
 {Visual}["x]C		Delete the highlighted lines [into register x] and
 			start insert.  In Visual block mode it works
-			differently |v_b_C|.  {not in Vi}
+			differently |v_b_C|.
 							*v_S*
 {Visual}["x]S		Delete the highlighted lines [into register x] and
-			start insert (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not
+			start insert (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
-			in Vi}
 							*v_R*
 {Visual}["x]R		Currently just like {Visual}["x]S.  In a next version
-			it might work differently. {not in Vi}
+			it might work differently.
 
 Notes:
 - You can end Insert and Replace mode with <Esc>.
@@ -273,8 +268,6 @@ r{char}			Replace the character under the cursor with {char}.
 			If {char} is a <CR> or <NL>, a line break replaces the
 			character.  To replace with a real <CR>, use CTRL-V
 			<CR>.  CTRL-V <NL> replaces with a <Nul>.
-			{Vi: CTRL-V <CR> still replaces with a line break,
-			cannot replace something with a <CR>}
 
 			If {char} is CTRL-E or CTRL-Y the character from the
 			line below or above is used, just like with |i_CTRL-E|
@@ -315,28 +308,26 @@ The following commands change the case of letters.  The currently active
 							*~*
 ~			'notildeop' option: Switch case of the character
 			under the cursor and move the cursor to the right.
-			If a [count] is given, do that many characters. {Vi:
+			If a [count] is given, do that many characters.
-			no count}
 
-~{motion}		'tildeop' option: switch case of {motion} text. {Vi:
+~{motion}		'tildeop' option: switch case of {motion} text.
-			tilde cannot be used as an operator}
 
 							*g~*
-g~{motion}		Switch case of {motion} text. {not in Vi}
+g~{motion}		Switch case of {motion} text.
 
 g~g~							*g~g~* *g~~*
-g~~			Switch case of current line. {not in Vi}.
+g~~			Switch case of current line.
 
 							*v_~*
 {Visual}~		Switch case of highlighted text (for {Visual} see
-			|Visual-mode|). {not in Vi}
+			|Visual-mode|).
 
 							*v_U*
 {Visual}U		Make highlighted text uppercase (for {Visual} see
-			|Visual-mode|). {not in Vi}
+			|Visual-mode|).
 
 							*gU* *uppercase*
-gU{motion}		Make {motion} text uppercase. {not in Vi}
+gU{motion}		Make {motion} text uppercase.
 			Example: >
 				:map! <C-F> <Esc>gUiw`]a
 <			This works in Insert mode: press CTRL-F to make the
@@ -345,27 +336,27 @@ gU{motion}		Make {motion} text uppercase. {not in Vi}
 
 
 gUgU							*gUgU* *gUU*
-gUU			Make current line uppercase. {not in Vi}.
+gUU			Make current line uppercase.
 
 							*v_u*
 {Visual}u		Make highlighted text lowercase (for {Visual} see
-			|Visual-mode|).  {not in Vi}
+			|Visual-mode|).
 
 							*gu* *lowercase*
-gu{motion}		Make {motion} text lowercase. {not in Vi}
+gu{motion}		Make {motion} text lowercase.
 
 gugu							*gugu* *guu*
-guu			Make current line lowercase. {not in Vi}.
+guu			Make current line lowercase.
 
 							*g?* *rot13*
-g?{motion}		Rot13 encode {motion} text. {not in Vi}
+g?{motion}		Rot13 encode {motion} text.
 
 							*v_g?*
 {Visual}g?		Rot13 encode the highlighted text (for {Visual} see
-			|Visual-mode|).  {not in Vi}
+			|Visual-mode|).
 
 g?g?							*g?g?* *g??*
-g??			Rot13 encode current line. {not in Vi}.
+g??			Rot13 encode current line.
 
 To turn one line into title caps, make every first letter of a word
 uppercase: >
@@ -375,18 +366,18 @@ uppercase: >
 Adding and subtracting ~
 							*CTRL-A*
 CTRL-A			Add [count] to the number or alphabetic character at
-			or after the cursor.  {not in Vi}
+			or after the cursor.
 
 							*v_CTRL-A*
 {Visual}CTRL-A		Add [count] to the number or alphabetic character in
-			the highlighted text.  {not in Vi}
+			the highlighted text.
 
 							*v_g_CTRL-A*
 {Visual}g CTRL-A	Add [count] to the number or alphabetic character in
 			the highlighted text. If several lines are
 		        highlighted, each one will be incremented by an
 			additional [count] (so effectively creating a
-			[count] incrementing sequence).  {not in Vi}
+			[count] incrementing sequence).
 			For Example, if you have this list of numbers:
 				1. ~
 				1. ~
@@ -401,11 +392,11 @@ CTRL-A			Add [count] to the number or alphabetic character at
 
 							*CTRL-X*
 CTRL-X			Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
-			character at or after the cursor.  {not in Vi}
+			character at or after the cursor.
 
 							*v_CTRL-X*
 {Visual}CTRL-X		Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
-			character in the highlighted text.  {not in Vi}
+			character in the highlighted text.
 
 			On MS-Windows, this is mapped to cut Visual text
 			|dos-standard-mappings|.  If you want to disable the
@@ -417,7 +408,7 @@ CTRL-X			Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
 			character in the highlighted text. If several lines
 			are highlighted, each value will be decremented by an
 			additional [count] (so effectively creating a [count]
-			decrementing sequence).  {not in Vi}
+			decrementing sequence).
 
 The CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands can work for:
 - signed and unsigned decimal numbers
@@ -485,8 +476,7 @@ SHIFTING LINES LEFT OR RIGHT				*shift-left-right*
 
 							*v_<*
 {Visual}[count]<	Shift the highlighted lines [count] 'shiftwidth'
-			leftwards (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not in
+			leftwards (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
-			Vi}
 
 							*>*
  >{motion}		Shift {motion} lines one 'shiftwidth' rightwards.
@@ -500,8 +490,7 @@ SHIFTING LINES LEFT OR RIGHT				*shift-left-right*
 
 							*v_>*
 {Visual}[count]>	Shift the highlighted lines [count] 'shiftwidth'
-			rightwards (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not in
+			rightwards (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
-			Vi}
 
 							*:<*
 :[range]<		Shift [range] lines one 'shiftwidth' left.  Repeat '<'
@@ -512,7 +501,7 @@ SHIFTING LINES LEFT OR RIGHT				*shift-left-right*
 			Repeat '<' for shifting multiple 'shiftwidth's.
 
 :[range]le[ft] [indent]	left align lines in [range].  Sets the indent in the
-			lines to [indent] (default 0).  {not in Vi}
+			lines to [indent] (default 0).
 
 							*:>*
 :[range]> [flags]	Shift {count} [range] lines one 'shiftwidth' right.
@@ -579,7 +568,6 @@ comment (starting with '"') after the `:!` command.
 							*v_!*
 {Visual}!{filter}	Filter the highlighted lines through the external
 			program {filter} (for {Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
-			{not in Vi}
 
 :{range}![!]{filter} [!][arg]				*:range!*
 			Filter {range} lines through the external program
@@ -613,7 +601,6 @@ comment (starting with '"') after the `:!` command.
 
 							*v_=*
 {Visual}=		Filter the highlighted lines like with ={motion}.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 
 						*tempfile* *setuid*
@@ -678,15 +665,13 @@ g&			Synonym for `:%s//~/&` (repeat last substitute with
 			For example, when you first do a substitution with
 			`:s/pattern/repl/flags` and then `/search` for
 			something else, `g&` will do `:%s/search/repl/flags`.
-			Mnemonic: global substitute. {not in Vi}
+			Mnemonic: global substitute.
 
 						*:snomagic* *:sno*
 :[range]sno[magic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'nomagic'.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 						*:smagic* *:sm*
 :[range]sm[agic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'magic'.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:s_flags*
 The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
@@ -697,7 +682,6 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 		:&&
 		:s/this/that/&
 <	Note that `:s` and `:&` don't keep the flags.
-	{not in Vi}
 
 [c]	Confirm each substitution.  Vim highlights the matching string (with
 	|hl-IncSearch|).  You can type:				*:s_c*
@@ -705,16 +689,15 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 	    'l'	    to substitute this match and then quit ("last")
 	    'n'	    to skip this match
 	    <Esc>   to quit substituting
-	    'a'	    to substitute this and all remaining matches {not in Vi}
+	    'a'	    to substitute this and all remaining matches
-	    'q'	    to quit substituting {not in Vi}
+	    'q'	    to quit substituting
-	    CTRL-E  to scroll the screen up {not in Vi, not available when
+	    CTRL-E  to scroll the screen up {not available when compiled
-			compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature}
+		       without the |+insert_expand| feature}
-	    CTRL-Y  to scroll the screen down {not in Vi, not available when
+	    CTRL-Y  to scroll the screen down {not available when compiled
-			compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature}
+		       without the |+insert_expand| feature}
 	If the 'edcompatible' option is on, Vim remembers the [c] flag and
 	toggles it each time you use it, but resets it when you give a new
 	search pattern.
-	{not in Vi: highlighting of the match, other responses than 'y' or 'n'}
 
 							*:s_e*
 [e]     When the search pattern fails, do not issue an error message and, in
@@ -726,7 +709,6 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 		No previous substitute regular expression
 		Trailing characters
 		Interrupted
-	{not in Vi}
 
 							*:s_g*
 [g]	Replace all occurrences in the line.  Without this argument,
@@ -739,12 +721,10 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 							*:s_i*
 [i]	Ignore case for the pattern.  The 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' options
 	are not used.
-	{not in Vi}
 
 							*:s_I*
 [I]	Don't ignore case for the pattern.  The 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'
 	options are not used.
-	{not in Vi}
 
 							*:s_n*
 [n]	Report the number of matches, do not actually substitute.  The [c]
@@ -776,7 +756,6 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 		/green
 		:&
 <	The last command will replace "blue" with "red".
-	{not in Vi}
 
 Note that there is no flag to change the "magicness" of the pattern.  A
 different command is used instead, or you can use |/\v| and friends.  The
@@ -1002,7 +981,6 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.
 			a single tabstop.  Each value in the list represents
 			the width of one tabstop, except the final value which
 			applies to all following tabstops.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*retab-example*
 Example for using autocommands and ":retab" to edit a file which is stored
@@ -1026,17 +1004,16 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 :reg[isters]		Display the contents of all numbered and named
 			registers.  If a register is written to for |:redir|
 			it will not be listed.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 
 :reg[isters] {arg}	Display the contents of the numbered and named
 			registers that are mentioned in {arg}.  For example: >
 				:reg 1a
 <			to display registers '1' and 'a'.  Spaces are allowed
-			in {arg}.  {not in Vi}
+			in {arg}.
 
 							*:di* *:display*
-:di[splay] [arg]	Same as :registers.  {not in Vi}
+:di[splay] [arg]	Same as :registers.
 
 							*y* *yank*
 ["x]y{motion}		Yank {motion} text [into register x].  When no
@@ -1055,11 +1032,11 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 
 							*v_y*
 {Visual}["x]y		Yank the highlighted text [into register x] (for
-			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not in Vi}
+			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
 
 							*v_Y*
 {Visual}["x]Y		Yank the highlighted lines [into register x] (for
-			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not in Vi}
+			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
 
 							*:y* *:yank* *E850*
 :[range]y[ank] [x]	Yank [range] lines [into register x]. Yanking to the
@@ -1073,11 +1050,11 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 
 							*p* *put* *E353*
 ["x]p			Put the text [from register x] after the cursor
-			[count] times.  {Vi: no count}
+			[count] times.
 
 							*P*
 ["x]P			Put the text [from register x] before the cursor
-			[count] times.  {Vi: no count}
+			[count] times.
 
 							*<MiddleMouse>*
 ["x]<MiddleMouse>	Put the text from a register before the cursor [count]
@@ -1086,7 +1063,6 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 			Leaves the cursor at the end of the new text.
 			Using the mouse only works when 'mouse' contains 'n'
 			or 'a'.
-			{not in Vi}
 			If you have a scrollwheel and often accidentally paste
 			text, you can use these mappings to disable the
 			pasting with the middle mouse button: >
@@ -1097,11 +1073,11 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 
 							*gp*
 ["x]gp			Just like "p", but leave the cursor just after the new
-			text.  {not in Vi}
+			text.
 
 							*gP*
 ["x]gP			Just like "P", but leave the cursor just after the new
-			text.  {not in Vi}
+			text.
 
 							*:pu* *:put*
 :[line]pu[t] [x]	Put the text [from register x] after [line] (default
@@ -1129,14 +1105,14 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 ["x]]p		    or					*]p* *]<MiddleMouse>*
 ["x]]<MiddleMouse>	Like "p", but adjust the indent to the current line.
 			Using the mouse only works when 'mouse' contains 'n'
-			or 'a'.  {not in Vi}
+			or 'a'.
 
 ["x][P		    or					*[P*
 ["x]]P		    or					*]P*
 ["x][p		    or					*[p* *[<MiddleMouse>*
 ["x][<MiddleMouse>	Like "P", but adjust the indent to the current line.
 			Using the mouse only works when 'mouse' contains 'n'
-			or 'a'.  {not in Vi}
+			or 'a'.
 
 You can use these commands to copy text from one place to another.  Do this
 by first getting the text into a register with a yank, delete or change
@@ -1246,7 +1222,6 @@ not exist}
 3. Small delete register "-				*quote_-* *quote-*
 This register contains text from commands that delete less than one line,
 except when the command specifies a register with ["x].
-{not in Vi}
 
 4. Named registers "a to "z or "A to "Z			*quote_alpha* *quotea*
 Vim fills these registers only when you say so.  Specify them as lowercase
@@ -1256,7 +1231,7 @@ a line break is inserted before the appended text.
 
 5. Read-only registers ":, ". and "%
 These are '%', '#', ':' and '.'.  You can use them only with the "p", "P",
-and ":put" commands and with CTRL-R.  {not in Vi}
+and ":put" commands and with CTRL-R.
 						*quote_.* *quote.* *E29*
 	".	Contains the last inserted text (the same as what is inserted
 		with the insert mode commands CTRL-A and CTRL-@).  Note: this
@@ -1310,13 +1285,13 @@ an error message (use string() to convert).
 
 If the "= register is used for the "p" command, the String is split up at <NL>
 characters.  If the String ends in a <NL>, it is regarded as a linewise
-register.  {not in Vi}
+register.
 
 8. Selection and drop registers "*, "+ and "~ 
 Use these registers for storing and retrieving the selected text for the GUI.
 See |quotestar| and |quoteplus|.  When the clipboard is not available or not
 working, the unnamed register is used instead.  For Unix systems the clipboard
-is only available when the |+xterm_clipboard| feature is present.  {not in Vi}
+is only available when the |+xterm_clipboard| feature is present.
 
 Note that there is only a distinction between "* and "+ for X11 systems.  For
 an explanation of the difference, see |x11-selection|.  Under MS-Windows, use
@@ -1327,7 +1302,7 @@ The read-only "~ register stores the dropped text from the last drag'n'drop
 operation.  When something has been dropped onto Vim, the "~ register is
 filled in and the <Drop> pseudo key is sent for notification.  You can remap
 this key if you want; the default action (for all modes) is to insert the
-contents of the "~ register at the cursor position.  {not in Vi}
+contents of the "~ register at the cursor position.
 {only available when compiled with the |+dnd| feature, currently only with the
 GTK GUI}
 
@@ -1337,7 +1312,7 @@ Drag'n'drop of URI lists is handled internally.
 9. Black hole register "_				*quote_*
 When writing to this register, nothing happens.  This can be used to delete
 text without affecting the normal registers.  When reading from this register,
-nothing is returned.  {not in Vi}
+nothing is returned.
 
 10. Last search pattern register	"/			*quote_/* *quote/*
 Contains the most recent search-pattern.  This is used for "n" and 'hlsearch'.
@@ -1346,7 +1321,6 @@ other matches without actually searching.  You can't yank or delete into this
 register.  The search direction is available in |v:searchforward|.
 Note that the value is restored when returning from a function
 |function-search-undo|.
-{not in Vi}
 
 							*@/*
 You can write to a register with a `:let` command |:let-@|.  Example: >
@@ -1377,17 +1351,15 @@ The next three commands always work on whole lines.
 :[range]ce[nter] [width]				*:ce* *:center*
 			Center lines in [range] between [width] columns
 			(default 'textwidth' or 80 when 'textwidth' is 0).
-			{not in Vi}
 
 :[range]ri[ght] [width]					*:ri* *:right*
 			Right-align lines in [range] at [width] columns
 			(default 'textwidth' or 80 when 'textwidth' is 0).
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:le* *:left*
 :[range]le[ft] [indent]
 			Left-align lines in [range].  Sets the indent in the
-			lines to [indent] (default 0).  {not in Vi}
+			lines to [indent] (default 0).
 
 							*gq*
 gq{motion}		Format the lines that {motion} moves over.
@@ -1414,24 +1386,24 @@ gq{motion}		Format the lines that {motion} moves over.
 
 gqgq							*gqgq* *gqq*
 gqq			Format the current line.  With a count format that
-			many lines.  {not in Vi}
+			many lines.
 
 							*v_gq*
 {Visual}gq		Format the highlighted text.  (for {Visual} see
-			|Visual-mode|).  {not in Vi}
+			|Visual-mode|).
 
 							*gw*
 gw{motion}		Format the lines that {motion} moves over.  Similar to
 			|gq| but puts the cursor back at the same position in
 			the text.  However, 'formatprg' and 'formatexpr' are
-			not used.  {not in Vi}
+			not used.
 
 gwgw							*gwgw* *gww*
-gww			Format the current line as with "gw".  {not in Vi}
+gww			Format the current line as with "gw".
 
 							*v_gw*
 {Visual}gw		Format the highlighted text as with "gw".  (for
-			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).  {not in Vi}
+			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|).
 
 Example: To format the current paragraph use:			*gqap*  >
 	gqap

runtime/doc/channel.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*channel.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Apr 18
+*channel.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -24,7 +24,6 @@ The Netbeans interface also uses a channel. |netbeans|
 11. Controlling a job			|job-control|
 12. Using a prompt buffer		|prompt-buffer|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these features}
 {only when compiled with the |+channel| feature for channel stuff}
 	You can check this with: `has('channel')`
 {only when compiled with the |+job| feature for job stuff}
@@ -308,9 +307,10 @@ higher.
 
 Command "redraw" ~
 
-The other commands do not update the screen, so that you can send a sequence
+The other commands do not explicitly update the screen, so that you can send a
-of commands without the cursor moving around.  You must end with the "redraw"
+sequence of commands without the cursor moving around.  A redraw can happen as
-command to show any changed text and show the cursor where it belongs.
+a side effect of some commands.  You must end with the "redraw" command to
+show any changed text and show the cursor where it belongs.
 
 The argument is normally an empty string:
 	["redraw", ""] ~

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 May 14
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -27,7 +27,6 @@ Basic command line editing is explained in chapter 20 of the user manual
 Normally characters are inserted in front of the cursor position.  You can
 move around in the command-line with the left and right cursor keys.  With the
 <Insert> key, you can toggle between inserting and overstriking characters.
-{Vi: can only alter the last character in the line}
 
 Note that if your keyboard does not have working cursor keys or any of the
 other special keys, you can use ":cnoremap" to define another key for them.
@@ -66,7 +65,6 @@ Notes:
 - All searches are put in the search history, including the ones that come
   from commands like "*" and "#".  But for a mapping, only the last search is
   remembered (to avoid that long mappings trash the history).
-{Vi: no history}
 {not available when compiled without the |+cmdline_hist| feature}
 
 There is an automatic completion of names on the command-line; see
@@ -124,12 +122,12 @@ CTRL-U		Remove all characters between the cursor position and
 			:cnoremap <C-U> <C-E><C-U>
 <
 						*c_<Insert>* *c_Insert*
-<Insert>	Toggle between insert and overstrike.  {not in Vi}
+<Insert>	Toggle between insert and overstrike.
 
 {char1} <BS> {char2}	or				*c_digraph*
 CTRL-K {char1} {char2}					*c_CTRL-K*
 		enter digraph (see |digraphs|).  When {char1} is a special
-		key, the code for that key is inserted in <> form.  {not in Vi}
+		key, the code for that key is inserted in <> form.
 
 CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#:-=.}					*c_CTRL-R* *c_<C-R>*
 		Insert the contents of a numbered or named register.  Between
@@ -165,7 +163,7 @@ CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#:-=.}					*c_CTRL-R* *c_<C-R>*
 				too.
 				When the result is a Float it's automatically
 				converted to a String.
-		See |registers| about registers.  {not in Vi}
+		See |registers| about registers.
 		Implementation detail: When using the |expression| register
 		and invoking setcmdpos(), this sets the position before
 		inserting the resulting string.  Use CTRL-R CTRL-R to set the
@@ -188,7 +186,6 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-L				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-L* *c_<C-R>_<C-L>*
 		currently displayed match is used.  With CTRL-W the part of
 		the word that was already typed is not inserted again.
 
-		{not in Vi}
 		CTRL-F and CTRL-P: {only when |+file_in_path| feature is
 		included}
 
@@ -313,11 +310,9 @@ CTRL-^		Toggle the use of language |:lmap| mappings and/or Input
 		off, since you are expected to type a command.  After
 		switching it on with CTRL-^, the new state is not used again
 		for the next command or Search pattern.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 						*c_CTRL-]*
-CTRL-]		Trigger abbreviation, without inserting a character.  {not in
+CTRL-]		Trigger abbreviation, without inserting a character.
-		Vi}
 
 For Emacs-style editing on the command-line see |emacs-keys|.
 
@@ -332,7 +327,6 @@ terminals)
 
 							*:his* *:history*
 :his[tory]	Print the history of last entered commands.
-		{not in Vi}
 		{not available when compiled without the |+cmdline_hist|
 		feature}
 
@@ -344,7 +338,6 @@ terminals)
 		i[nput]	 or @		input line history
 		d[ebug]	 or >		debug command history
 		a[ll]			all of the above
-		{not in Vi}
 
 		If the numbers {first} and/or {last} are given, the respective
 		range of entries from a history is listed.  These numbers can

runtime/doc/debug.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debug.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Jul 15
+*debug.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -78,15 +78,10 @@ matches the EXE (same date).
 If you built the executable yourself with the Microsoft Visual C++ compiler,
 then the PDB was built with the EXE.
 
-Alternatively, if you have the source files, you can import Make_ivc.mak into
-Visual Studio as a workspace.  Then select a debug configuration, build and
-you can do all kinds of debugging (set breakpoints, watch variables, etc.).
-
 If you have Visual Studio, use that instead of the VC Toolkit and WinDbg.
 
-For other compilers, you should always use the corresponding debugger: TD for
+For other compilers, you should always use the corresponding debugger: gdb
-a Vim executable compiled with the Borland compiler; gdb (see above
+(see above |debug-gcc|) for the Cygwin and MinGW compilers.
-|debug-gcc|) for the Cygwin and MinGW compilers.
 
 
 								*debug-vs2005*

runtime/doc/debugger.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Nov 21
+*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Debugger Support Features				*debugger-support*
 2. Vim Compile Options		|debugger-compilation|
 3. Integrated Debuggers		|debugger-integration|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these features}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Debugger Features					*debugger-features*

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -278,7 +278,6 @@ wait		don't use as argument to a function, conflicts with types.h
 index		shadows global declaration
 time		shadows global declaration
 new		C++ reserved keyword
-try		Borland C++ doesn't like it to be used as a variable.
 
 clear		Mac curses.h
 echo		Mac curses.h

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Oct 03
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -16,8 +16,6 @@ The basics are explained in section |08.7| of the user manual.
 4. Copying diffs		|copy-diffs|
 5. Diff options			|diff-options|
 
-{not in Vi}
-
 ==============================================================================
 1. Starting diff mode					*start-vimdiff*
 
@@ -179,8 +177,8 @@ loaded.  Since Vim doesn't allow having two buffers for the same file, you
 need another buffer.  This command is useful: >
 	 command DiffOrig vert new | set bt=nofile | r ++edit # | 0d_
 	 	\ | diffthis | wincmd p | diffthis
-(this is in |vimrc_example.vim|).  Use ":DiffOrig" to see the differences
+(this is in |defaults.vim|).  Use ":DiffOrig" to see the differences between
-between the current buffer and the file it was loaded from.
+the current buffer and the file it was loaded from.
 
 A buffer that is unloaded cannot be used for the diff.  But it does work for
 hidden buffers.  You can use ":hide" to close a window without unloading the

runtime/doc/digraph.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 17
+*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -18,7 +18,6 @@ An alternative is using the 'keymap' option.
 2. Using digraphs	|digraphs-use|
 3. Default digraphs	|digraphs-default|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Defining digraphs					*digraphs-define*

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Dec 16
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -44,14 +44,14 @@ An alternate file name is remembered for each window.
 :keepalt {cmd}		Execute {cmd} while keeping the current alternate file
 			name.  Note that commands invoked indirectly (e.g.,
 			with a function) may still set the alternate file
-			name.  {not in Vi}
+			name.
 
 All file names are remembered in the buffer list.  When you enter a file name,
 for editing (e.g., with ":e filename") or writing (e.g., with ":w filename"),
 the file name is added to the list.  You can use the buffer list to remember
 which files you edited and to quickly switch from one file to another (e.g.,
 to copy text) with the |CTRL-^| command.  First type the number of the file
-and then hit CTRL-^.  {Vi: only one alternate file name is remembered}
+and then hit CTRL-^.
 
 
 CTRL-G		or				*CTRL-G* *:f* *:fi* *:file*
@@ -60,14 +60,13 @@ CTRL-G		or				*CTRL-G* *:f* *:fi* *:file*
 			option is set), and the file status (readonly,
 			modified, read errors, new file).  See the 'shortmess'
 			option about how to make this message shorter.
-			{Vi does not include column number}
 
 :f[ile]!		like |:file|, but don't truncate the name even when
 			'shortmess' indicates this.
 
 {count}CTRL-G		Like CTRL-G, but prints the current file name with
 			full path.  If the count is higher than 1 the current
-			buffer number is also given.  {not in Vi}
+			buffer number is also given.
 
 					*g_CTRL-G* *word-count* *byte-count*
 g CTRL-G		Prints the current position of the cursor in five
@@ -80,7 +79,6 @@ g CTRL-G		Prints the current position of the cursor in five
 			column are shown, separated with a dash.
 			Also see the 'ruler' option and the |wordcount()|
 			function.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*v_g_CTRL-G*
 {Visual}g CTRL-G	Similar to "g CTRL-G", but Word, Character, Line, and
@@ -88,7 +86,6 @@ g CTRL-G		Prints the current position of the cursor in five
 			displayed.
 			In Blockwise mode, Column count is also shown.  (For
 			{Visual} see |Visual-mode|.)
-			{not in VI}
 
 							*:file_f*
 :f[ile][!] {name}	Sets the current file name to {name}.  The optional !
@@ -98,14 +95,12 @@ g CTRL-G		Prints the current position of the cursor in five
 			to hold the old name.
 							*:0file*
 :0f[ile][!]		Remove the name of the current buffer.  The optional !
-			avoids truncating the message, as with |:file|.  {not
+			avoids truncating the message, as with |:file|.
-			in Vi}
 
 :buffers
 :files
 :ls			List all the currently known file names.  See
-			'windows.txt' |:files| |:buffers| |:ls|.  {not in
+			'windows.txt' |:files| |:buffers| |:ls|.
-			Vi}
 
 Vim will remember the full path name of a file name that you enter.  In most
 cases when the file name is displayed only the name you typed is shown, but
@@ -202,7 +197,6 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 			buffer and 'autowriteall' isn't set or the file can't
 			be written.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 							*:edit!* *discard*
 :e[dit]! [++opt] [+cmd]
@@ -210,7 +204,6 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 			the current buffer.  This is useful if you want to
 			start all over again.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 							*:edit_f*
 :e[dit] [++opt] [+cmd] {file}
@@ -219,14 +212,12 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 			buffer, unless 'hidden' is set or 'autowriteall' is
 			set and the file can be written.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 							*:edit!_f*
 :e[dit]! [++opt] [+cmd] {file}
 			Edit {file} always.  Discard any changes to the
 			current buffer.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 :e[dit] [++opt] [+cmd] #[count]
 			Edit the [count]th buffer (as shown by |:files|).
@@ -234,7 +225,6 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 			#" doesn't work if the alternate buffer doesn't have a
 			file name, while CTRL-^ still works then.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 							*:ene* *:enew*
 :ene[w]			Edit a new, unnamed buffer.  This fails when changes
@@ -244,19 +234,17 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 			If 'fileformats' is not empty, the first format given
 			will be used for the new buffer.  If 'fileformats' is
 			empty, the 'fileformat' of the current buffer is used.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ene!* *:enew!*
 :ene[w]!		Edit a new, unnamed buffer.  Discard any changes to
 			the current buffer.
 			Set 'fileformat' like |:enew|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:fin* *:find*
 :fin[d][!] [++opt] [+cmd] {file}
 			Find {file} in 'path' and then |:edit| it.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when the |+file_in_path|
+			{not available when the |+file_in_path| feature was
-			feature was disabled at compile time}
+			disabled at compile time}
 
 :{count}fin[d][!] [++opt] [+cmd] {file}
 			Just like ":find", but use the {count} match in
@@ -278,7 +266,7 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 :vie[w][!] [++opt] [+cmd] file
 			When used in Ex mode: Leave |Ex-mode|, go back to
 			Normal mode.  Otherwise same as |:edit|, but set
-			'readonly' option for this buffer.  {not in Vi}
+			'readonly' option for this buffer.
 
 							*CTRL-^* *CTRL-6*
 CTRL-^			Edit the alternate file.  Mostly the alternate file is
@@ -297,7 +285,6 @@ CTRL-^			Edit the alternate file.  Mostly the alternate file is
 			":e #[count]").  This is a quick way to switch between
 			files.
 			See |CTRL-^| above for further details.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 [count]]f						*]f* *[f*
 [count][f		Same as "gf".  Deprecated.
@@ -331,7 +318,6 @@ CTRL-^			Edit the alternate file.  Mostly the alternate file is
 			For Unix the '~' character is expanded, like in
 			"~user/file".  Environment variables are expanded too
 			|expand-env|.
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when the |+file_in_path| feature was
 			disabled at compile time}
 
@@ -341,7 +327,6 @@ CTRL-^			Edit the alternate file.  Mostly the alternate file is
 			Leading blanks are skipped, otherwise all blanks and
 			special characters are included in the file name.
 			(For {Visual} see |Visual-mode|.)
-			{not in VI}
 
 							*gF*
 [count]gF		Same as "gf", except if a number follows the file
@@ -617,14 +602,12 @@ list of the current window.
 			the first one.  This fails when changes have been made
 			and Vim does not want to |abandon| the current buffer.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 :ar[gs]! [++opt] [+cmd] {arglist}			*:args_f!*
 			Define {arglist} as the new argument list and edit
 			the first one.  Discard any changes to the current
 			buffer.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 :[count]arge[dit][!] [++opt] [+cmd] {name} ..		*:arge* *:argedit*
 			Add {name}s to the argument list and edit it.
@@ -637,7 +620,6 @@ list of the current window.
 			still be added to the argument list, but won't be
 			edited. No check for duplicates is done.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 :[count]arga[dd] {name} ..			*:arga* *:argadd* *E479*
 :[count]arga[dd]
@@ -659,7 +641,6 @@ list of the current window.
 			There is no check for duplicates, it is possible to
 			add a file to the argument list twice.
 			The currently edited file is not changed.
-			{not in Vi}
 			Note: you can also use this method: >
 				:args ## x
 <			This will add the "x" item and sort the new list.
@@ -673,7 +654,6 @@ list of the current window.
 			when it's deleted from the argument list.
 			Example: >
 				:argdel *.obj
-<			{not in Vi}
 
 :[range]argd[elete]	Delete the {range} files from the argument list.
 			Example: >
@@ -688,7 +668,6 @@ list of the current window.
 <			Removes all the files from the arglist.
 			When the last number in the range is too high, up to
 			the last argument is deleted.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:argu* *:argument*
 :[count]argu[ment] [count] [++opt] [+cmd]
@@ -697,25 +676,21 @@ list of the current window.
 			when changes have been made and Vim does not want to
 			|abandon| the current buffer.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 :[count]argu[ment]! [count] [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Edit file [count] in the argument list, discard any
 			changes to the current buffer.  When [count] is
 			omitted the current entry is used.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 :[count]n[ext] [++opt] [+cmd]			*:n* *:ne* *:next* *E165* *E163*
 			Edit [count] next file.  This fails when changes have
 			been made and Vim does not want to |abandon| the
-			current buffer.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.  {Vi: no
+			current buffer.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			count or ++opt}.
 
 :[count]n[ext]! [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Edit [count] next file, discard any changes to the
-			buffer.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.  {Vi: no count
+			buffer.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			or ++opt}.
 
 :n[ext] [++opt] [+cmd] {arglist}			*:next_f*
 			Same as |:args_f|.
@@ -727,65 +702,63 @@ list of the current window.
 			Edit [count] previous file in argument list.  This
 			fails when changes have been made and Vim does not
 			want to |abandon| the current buffer.
-			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.  {Vi: no count or ++opt}.
+			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 
 :[count]N[ext]! [count] [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Edit [count] previous file in argument list.  Discard
 			any changes to the buffer.  Also see |++opt| and
-			|+cmd|.  {Vi: no count or ++opt}.
+			|+cmd|.
 
 :[count]prev[ious] [count] [++opt] [+cmd]		*:prev* *:previous*
-			Same as :Next.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.  {Vi:
+			Same as :Next.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			only in some versions}
 
 							*:rew* *:rewind*
 :rew[ind] [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Start editing the first file in the argument list.
 			This fails when changes have been made and Vim does
 			not want to |abandon| the current buffer.
-			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|. {Vi: no ++opt}
+			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 
 :rew[ind]! [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Start editing the first file in the argument list.
 			Discard any changes to the buffer.  Also see |++opt|
-			and |+cmd|. {Vi: no ++opt}
+			and |+cmd|.
 
 							*:fir* *:first*
 :fir[st][!] [++opt] [+cmd]
-			Other name for ":rewind". {not in Vi}
+			Other name for ":rewind".
 
 							*:la* *:last*
 :la[st] [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Start editing the last file in the argument list.
 			This fails when changes have been made and Vim does
 			not want to |abandon| the current buffer.
-			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.  {not in Vi}
+			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 
 :la[st]! [++opt] [+cmd]
 			Start editing the last file in the argument list.
 			Discard any changes to the buffer.  Also see |++opt|
-			and |+cmd|.  {not in Vi}
+			and |+cmd|.
 
 							*:wn* *:wnext*
 :[count]wn[ext] [++opt]
 			Write current file and start editing the [count]
-			next file.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.  {not in Vi}
+			next file.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 
 :[count]wn[ext] [++opt] {file}
 			Write current file to {file} and start editing the
 			[count] next file, unless {file} already exists and
 			the 'writeany' option is off.  Also see |++opt| and
-			|+cmd|.  {not in Vi}
+			|+cmd|.
 
 :[count]wn[ext]! [++opt] {file}
 			Write current file to {file} and start editing the
-			[count] next file.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.  {not
+			[count] next file.  Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
-			in Vi}
 
 :[count]wN[ext][!] [++opt] [file]		*:wN* *:wNext*
 :[count]wp[revious][!] [++opt] [file]		*:wp* *:wprevious*
 			Same as :wnext, but go to previous file instead of
-			next.  {not in Vi}
+			next.
 
 The [count] in the commands above defaults to one.  For some commands it is
 possible to use two counts.  The last one (rightmost one) is used.
@@ -826,8 +799,6 @@ fourth file in the argument list.  This happens when you do ":e file".
 
 LOCAL ARGUMENT LIST
 
-{not in Vi}
-
 							*:arglocal*
 :argl[ocal]		Make a local copy of the global argument list.
 			Doesn't start editing another file.
@@ -878,7 +849,6 @@ USING THE ARGUMENT LIST
 			autocommand event is disabled by adding it to
 			'eventignore'.  This considerably speeds up editing
 			each file.
-			{not in Vi}
 			Also see |:windo|, |:tabdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
 			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
@@ -970,12 +940,11 @@ slower (but safer).
 			When 'filetype' is empty filetype detection is done
 			with the new name, before the file is written.
 			When the write was successful 'readonly' is reset.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:up* *:update*
 :[range]up[date][!] [++opt] [>>] [file]
 			Like ":write", but only write when the buffer has been
-			modified.  {not in Vi}
+			modified.
 
 
 WRITING WITH MULTIPLE BUFFERS				*buffer-write*
@@ -983,11 +952,11 @@ WRITING WITH MULTIPLE BUFFERS				*buffer-write*
 							*:wa* *:wall*
 :wa[ll]			Write all changed buffers.  Buffers without a file
 			name cause an error message.  Buffers which are
-			readonly are not written. {not in Vi}
+			readonly are not written.
 
 :wa[ll]!		Write all changed buffers, even the ones that are
 			readonly.  Buffers without a file name are not
-			written and cause an error message. {not in Vi}
+			written and cause an error message.
 
 
 Vim will warn you if you try to overwrite a file that has been changed
@@ -1118,7 +1087,7 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 
 :conf[irm] q[uit]	Quit, but give prompt when changes have been made, or
 			the last file in the argument list has not been
-			edited.  See |:confirm| and 'confirm'.  {not in Vi}
+			edited.  See |:confirm| and 'confirm'.
 
 :q[uit]!		Quit without writing, also when the current buffer has
 			changes.  The buffer is unloaded, also when it has
@@ -1131,7 +1100,7 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 
 :cq[uit]		Quit always, without writing, and return an error
 			code.  See |:cq|.  Used for Manx's QuickFix mode (see
-			|quickfix|).  {not in Vi}
+			|quickfix|).
 
 							*:wq*
 :wq [++opt]		Write the current file and quit.  Writing fails when
@@ -1169,7 +1138,7 @@ ZZ			Write current file, if modified, and quit (same as
 
 							*ZQ*
 ZQ			Quit without checking for changes (same as ":q!").
-			{not in Vi}
+
 
 MULTIPLE WINDOWS AND BUFFERS				*window-exit*
 
@@ -1177,36 +1146,35 @@ MULTIPLE WINDOWS AND BUFFERS				*window-exit*
 :qa[ll]		Exit Vim, unless there are some buffers which have been
 		changed.  (Use ":bmod" to go to the next modified buffer).
 		When 'autowriteall' is set all changed buffers will be
-		written, like |:wqall|. {not in Vi}
+		written, like |:wqall|.
 
 :conf[irm] qa[ll]
 		Exit Vim.  Bring up a prompt when some buffers have been
-		changed.  See |:confirm|. {not in Vi}
+		changed.  See |:confirm|.
 
-:qa[ll]!	Exit Vim.  Any changes to buffers are lost. {not in Vi}
+:qa[ll]!	Exit Vim.  Any changes to buffers are lost.
 		Also see |:cquit|, it does the same but exits with a non-zero
 		value.
 
 							*:quita* *:quitall*
-:quita[ll][!]	Same as ":qall". {not in Vi}
+:quita[ll][!]	Same as ":qall".
 
 :wqa[ll] [++opt]				*:wqa* *:wqall* *:xa* *:xall*
 :xa[ll]		Write all changed buffers and exit Vim.  If there are buffers
 		without a file name, which are readonly or which cannot be
-		written for another reason, Vim will not quit. {not in Vi}
+		written for another reason, Vim will not quit.
 
 :conf[irm] wqa[ll] [++opt]
 :conf[irm] xa[ll]
 		Write all changed buffers and exit Vim.  Bring up a prompt
 		when some buffers are readonly or cannot be written for
-		another reason.  See |:confirm|. {not in Vi}
+		another reason.  See |:confirm|.
 
 :wqa[ll]! [++opt]
 :xa[ll]!	Write all changed buffers, even the ones that are readonly,
 		and exit Vim.  If there are buffers without a file name or
 		which cannot be written for another reason, or there is a
 		terminal with a running job, Vim will not quit.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
 6. Dialogs						*edit-dialogs*
@@ -1304,9 +1272,10 @@ use has("browsefilter"): >
 ==============================================================================
 7. The current directory				*current-directory*
 
-You may use the |:cd| and |:lcd| commands to change to another directory, so
+You can use the |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| commands to change to another
-you will not have to type that directory name in front of the file names.  It
+directory, so you will not have to type that directory name in front of the
-also makes a difference for executing external commands, e.g. ":!ls".
+file names.  It also makes a difference for executing external commands, e.g.
+":!ls".
 
 Changing directory fails when the current buffer is modified, the '.' flag is
 present in 'cpoptions' and "!" is not used in the command.
@@ -1316,10 +1285,12 @@ present in 'cpoptions' and "!" is not used in the command.
 			name.  On Unix systems: Change the current directory
 			to the home directory.  Use |:pwd| to print the
 			current directory on all systems.
+			On Unix systems: clear any window-local directory.
 
 :cd[!] {path}		Change the current directory to {path}.
 			If {path} is relative, it is searched for in the
 			directories listed in |'cdpath'|.
+			Clear any window-local directory.
 			Does not change the meaning of an already opened file,
 			because its full path name is remembered.  Files from
 			the |arglist| may change though!
@@ -1329,36 +1300,54 @@ present in 'cpoptions' and "!" is not used in the command.
 <
 							*:cd-* *E186*
 :cd[!] -		Change to the previous current directory (before the
-			previous ":cd {path}" command). {not in Vi}
+			previous ":cd {path}" command).
 
 							*:chd* *:chdir*
 :chd[ir][!] [path]	Same as |:cd|.
 
+							*:tcd*
+:tcd[!] {path}		Like |:cd|, but only set the directory for the current
+			tab.  The current window will also use this directory.
+			The current directory is not changed for windows in
+			other tabs and for windows in the current tab that
+			have their own window-local directory.
+
+							*:tch* *:tchdir*
+:tch[dir][!]		Same as |:tcd|.
+
 							*:lc* *:lcd*
 :lc[d][!] {path}	Like |:cd|, but only set the current directory when
 			the cursor is in the current window.  The current
 			directory for other windows is not changed, switching
 			to another window will stop using {path}.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:lch* *:lchdir*
-:lch[dir][!]		Same as |:lcd|. {not in Vi}
+:lch[dir][!]		Same as |:lcd|.
 
 							*:pw* *:pwd* *E187*
-:pw[d]			Print the current directory name.  {Vi: no pwd}
+:pw[d]			Print the current directory name.
 			Also see |getcwd()|.
 
-So long as no |:lcd| command has been used, all windows share the same current
+So long as no |:lcd| or |:tcd| command has been used, all windows share the
-directory.  Using a command to jump to another window doesn't change anything
+same current directory.  Using a command to jump to another window doesn't
-for the current directory.
+change anything for the current directory.
+
 When a |:lcd| command has been used for a window, the specified directory
 becomes the current directory for that window.  Windows where the |:lcd|
-command has not been used stick to the global current directory.  When jumping
+command has not been used stick to the global or tab-local current directory.
-to another window the current directory will become the last specified local
+When jumping to another window the current directory will become the last
-current directory.  If none was specified, the global current directory is
+specified local current directory.  If none was specified, the global or
-used.
+tab-local current directory is used.
-When a |:cd| command is used, the current window will lose his local current
+
-directory and will use the global current directory from now on.
+When a |:tcd| command has been used for a tab page, the specified directory
+becomes the current directory for the current tab page and the current window.
+The current directory of other tab pages is not affected.  When jumping to
+another tab page, the current directory will become the last specified local
+directory for that tab page. If the current tab has no local current directory
+the global current directory is used.
+
+When a |:cd| command is used, the current window and tab page will lose the
+local current directory and will use the global current directory from now on.
 
 After using |:cd| the full path name will be used for reading and writing
 files.  On some networked file systems this may cause problems.  The result of
@@ -1395,8 +1384,7 @@ There are a few things to remember when editing binary files:
   file.  Otherwise both <CR> <NL> and <NL> are considered to end a line
   and when the file is written the <NL> will be replaced with <CR> <NL>.
 - <Nul> characters are shown on the screen as ^@.  You can enter them with
-  "CTRL-V CTRL-@" or "CTRL-V 000" {Vi cannot handle <Nul> characters in the
+  "CTRL-V CTRL-@" or "CTRL-V 000"
-  file}
 - To insert a <NL> character in the file split a line.  When writing the
   buffer to a file a <NL> will be written for the <EOL>.
 - Vim normally appends an <EOL> at the end of the file if there is none.

runtime/doc/farsi.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 16
+*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Mortaza Ghassab Shiran
@@ -6,7 +6,6 @@
 
 Right to Left and Farsi Mapping for Vim		*farsi* *Farsi*
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 						*E27*
 Farsi support has been removed in patch 8.1.0932.  At that time it was

runtime/doc/filetype.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Apr 18
+*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -12,7 +12,6 @@ Filetypes						*filetype* *file-type*
 
 Also see |autocmd.txt|.
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Filetypes					*filetypes* *file-types*

runtime/doc/fold.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*fold.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Mar 18
+*fold.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ You can find an introduction on folding in chapter 28 of the user manual.
 3. Fold options		|fold-options|
 4. Behavior of folds	|fold-behavior|
 
-{Vi has no Folding}
 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 06
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ Vim's Graphical User Interface				*gui* *GUI*
 3. Mouse Control		|gui-mouse|
 4. Making GUI Selections	|gui-selections|
 5. Menus			|menus|
-6. Extras			|gui-extras|
+6. Font				|gui-font|
-7. Shell Commands		|gui-shell|
+7. Extras			|gui-extras|
+8. Shell Commands		|gui-shell|
 
 Other GUI documentation:
 |gui_x11.txt|	For specific items of the X11 GUI.
 |gui_w32.txt|	For specific items of the Win32 GUI.
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Starting the GUI				*gui-start* *E229* *E233*
@@ -1037,7 +1037,139 @@ make a selection.
 Note that a menu that starts with ']' will not be displayed.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Extras						*gui-extras*
+6. Font
+
+This section describes font related options.
+
+GUIFONT							*gui-font*
+
+'guifont' is the option that tells Vim what font to use.  In its simplest form
+the value is just one font name.  It can also be a list of font names
+separated with commas.  The first valid font is used.  When no valid font can
+be found you will get an error message. 
+
+On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is not
+empty, then 'guifont' is not used.  See |xfontset|.
+
+Note: As to the GTK GUIs, no error is given against any invalid names, and the
+first element of the list is always picked up and made use of.  This is
+because, instead of identifying a given name with a font, the GTK GUIs use it
+to construct a pattern and try to look up a font which best matches the
+pattern among available fonts, and this way, the matching never fails.  An
+invalid name doesn't matter because a number of font properties other than
+name will do to get the matching done.
+
+Spaces after a comma are ignored.  To include a comma in a font name precede
+it with a backslash.  Setting an option requires an extra backslash before a
+space and a backslash.  See also |option-backslash|.  For example: >
+    :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
+will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it will
+try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
+
+If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.  If an
+empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource settings (for X,
+it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it will try some builtin
+default which should always be there ("7x13" in the case of X).  The font
+names given should be "normal" fonts.  Vim will try to find the related bold
+and italic fonts.
+
+For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: >
+    :set guifont=*
+will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
+
+The font name depends on the GUI used.  See |setting-guifont| for a way to set
+'guifont' for various systems.
+
+For the GTK+ 2 and 3 GUIs, the font name looks like this: >
+    :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
+That's all.  XLFDs are not used.  For Chinese this is reported to work well: >
+    if has("gui_gtk2")
+      set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12
+      set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12
+    endif
+<
+(Replace gui_gtk2 with gui_gtk3 for the GTK+ 3 GUI)
+
+For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >
+    :set guifont=Monaco:h10
+Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems.
+							*E236*
+Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same width).
+An exception is GTK: all fonts are accepted, but mono-spaced fonts look best.
+
+To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel" program.
+The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
+
+For the Win32 GUI					*E244* *E245*
+- Takes these options in the font name (use a ':' to separate the options):
+	hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
+	wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
+	WXX - weight is XX (see Note on Weights below)
+	b   - bold. This is equivalent to setting the weight to 700.
+	i   - italic
+	u   - underline
+	s   - strikeout
+	cXX - character set XX.  Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC, BALTIC,
+	      CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK, HANGEUL,
+	      HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS, SYMBOL, THAI,
+	      TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.  Normally you would use
+	      "cDEFAULT".
+	qXX - quality XX.  Valid quality names are: PROOF, DRAFT, ANTIALIASED,
+	      NONANTIALIASED, CLEARTYPE, DEFAULT.  Normally you would use
+	      "qDEFAULT".
+	      Some quality values are not supported in legacy OSs.
+- A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
+  backslashes to escape the spaces.
+Examples: >
+    :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
+    :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
+
+See also |font-sizes|.
+
+Note on Weights: Fonts often come with a variety of weights. "Normal" weights
+in Windows have a value of 400 and, left unspecified, this is the value that
+will be used when attempting to find fonts. Windows will often match fonts
+based on their weight with higher priority than the font name which means a
+Book or Medium variant of a font might be used despite specifying a Light or
+ExtraLight variant. If you are experiencing heavier weight substitution, then
+explicitly setting a lower weight value may mitigate against this unwanted
+substitution.
+
+
+GUIFONTWIDE						*gui-fontwide*
+
+When not empty, 'guifontwide' specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be
+used for double-width characters.  The first font that can be loaded is
+used.
+
+Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
+specified with 'guifont' and the same height.  If there is a mismatch then
+the text will not be drawn correctly.
+
+All GUI versions but GTK+:
+
+'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
+'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
+When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
+'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
+double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.
+
+GTK+ GUI only:  		    	*guifontwide_gtk*
+
+If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
+characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
+Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
+automatically.  If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
+font for characters not available in 'guifont'.  Thus you do not need
+to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
+made by Pango/Xft.
+
+Windows +multibyte only:		*guifontwide_win_mbyte*
+
+If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is used for IME instead of 'guifont'.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Extras						*gui-extras*
 
 This section describes other features which are related to the GUI.
 
@@ -1081,7 +1213,7 @@ A recommended Japanese font is MS Mincho.  You can find info here:
 http://www.lexikan.com/mincho.htm
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. Shell Commands					*gui-shell*
+8. Shell Commands					*gui-shell*
 
 For the X11 GUI the external commands are executed inside the gvim window.
 See |gui-pty|.

runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Oct 27
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ Other relevant documentation:
 |gui.txt|	For generic items of the GUI.
 |os_win32.txt| 	For Win32 specific items.
 
-{Vi does not have a Windows GUI}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Starting the GUI					*gui-w32-start*
@@ -31,6 +30,17 @@ The GUI will always run in the Windows subsystem.  Mostly shells automatically
 return with a command prompt after starting gvim.  If not, you should use the
 "start" command: >
 	start gvim [options] file ..
+<							*E988*
+The console version with the |-g| option may also start the GUI by executing
+gvim.exe: >
+	vim -g [options] file ..
+To make this work, gvim.exe must exist in the same directory as the vim.exe,
+and this feature must be enabled at compile time.
+
+One may also use `:gui` from the console version.  However, this is an
+experimental feature and this feature must be enabled at compile time.
+It uses a session file to recreate the current state of the console Vim in the
+GUI Vim.
 
 Note: All fonts (bold, italic) must be of the same size!!!  If you don't do
 this, text will disappear or mess up the display.  Vim does not check the font
@@ -403,7 +413,7 @@ be opened as normal.  See |drag-n-drop|.
 
 							*:simalt* *:sim*
 :sim[alt] {key}		simulate pressing {key} while holding Alt pressed.
-			{not in Vi} {only for Win32 versions}
+			{only for Win32 versions}
 			Note: ":si" means ":s" with the "i" flag.
 
 Normally, Vim takes control of all Alt-<Key> combinations, to increase the

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 May 06
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ Vim's Graphical User Interface				*gui-x11* *GUI-X11*
 Other relevant documentation:
 |gui.txt|	For generic items of the GUI.
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Starting the X11 GUI					*gui-x11-start* *E665*
@@ -48,7 +47,7 @@ that waits for gvim to exit), start gvim with "gvim -f", "vim -gf" or use
 ":gui -f".  Don't use "vim -fg", because "-fg" specifies the foreground
 color.
 
-When using "gvim -f" and then ":gui", Vim will run in the foreground.  The
+When using "vim -f" and then ":gui", Vim will run in the foreground.  The
 "-f" argument will be remembered.  To force running Vim in the background use
 ":gui -b".
 

runtime/doc/hebrew.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*hebrew.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2007 Jun 14
+*hebrew.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 	   VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ron Aaron (and Avner Lottem)
@@ -10,10 +10,7 @@ The supporting 'rightleft' functionality was originally created by Avner
 Lottem. <alottem at gmail dot com>  Ron Aaron <ron at ronware dot org> is
 currently helping support these features.
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{only available when the |+rightleft| feature was enabled at compile time}
-
-All this is only available when the |+rightleft| feature was enabled at
-compile time.
 
 
 Introduction

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -143,6 +143,7 @@ Special issues ~
 |remote.txt|	using Vim as a server or client
 |term.txt|	using different terminals and mice
 |terminal.txt|	Terminal window support
+|popup.txt|	popop window support
 
 Programming language support ~
 |indent.txt|	automatic indenting for C and other languages

runtime/doc/helphelp.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Mar 19
+*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -24,7 +24,6 @@ Help on help files					*helphelp*
 			the very top.
 			The 'helplang' option is used to select a language, if
 			the main help file is available in several languages.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 						*{subject}* *E149* *E661*
 :h[elp] {subject}	Like ":help", additionally jump to the tag {subject}.
@@ -97,7 +96,6 @@ Help on help files					*helphelp*
 			command from a following command.  You need to type
 			CTRL-V first to insert the <LF> or <CR>.  Example: >
 				:help so<C-V><CR>only
-<			{not in Vi}
 
 :h[elp]! [subject]	Like ":help", but in non-English help files prefer to
 			find a tag in a file with the same language as the
@@ -133,7 +131,6 @@ Help on help files					*helphelp*
 			|:execute| when needed.
 			Compressed help files will not be searched (Fedora
 			compresses the help files).
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:lh* *:lhelpgrep*
 :lh[elpgrep] {pattern}[@xx]
@@ -147,11 +144,11 @@ Help on help files					*helphelp*
 
 							*:exu* *:exusage*
 :exu[sage]		Show help on Ex commands.  Added to simulate the Nvi
-			command. {not in Vi}
+			command.
 
 							*:viu* *:viusage*
 :viu[sage]		Show help on Normal mode commands.  Added to simulate
-			the Nvi command. {not in Vi}
+			the Nvi command.
 
 When no argument is given to |:help| the file given with the 'helpfile' option
 will be opened.  Otherwise the specified tag is searched for in all "doc/tags"
@@ -199,7 +196,6 @@ command: >
 			Only for backwards compatibility.  It now executes the
 			ToolBar.FindHelp menu entry instead of using a builtin
 			dialog.  {only when compiled with |+GUI_GTK|}
-			{not in Vi}
 
 					*:helpt* *:helptags*
 				*E154* *E150* *E151* *E152* *E153* *E670*
@@ -224,8 +220,6 @@ command: >
 			To rebuild the help tags in the runtime directory
 			(requires write permission there): >
 				:helptags $VIMRUNTIME/doc
-<			{not in Vi}
-
 
 ==============================================================================
 2. Translated help files				*help-translated*

runtime/doc/if_cscop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Jan 21
+*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Andy Kahn
@@ -21,7 +21,6 @@ functions as you normally would with |tags|.
 7. Availability & Information	|cscope-info|
 
 This is currently for Unix and Win32 only.
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Cscope introduction					*cscope-intro*

runtime/doc/if_lua.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2015 Oct 16
+*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Luis Carvalho
@@ -10,23 +10,21 @@ The Lua Interface to Vim				*lua* *Lua*
 2. The vim module		|lua-vim|
 3. List userdata		|lua-list|
 4. Dict userdata		|lua-dict|
-5. Funcref userdata		|lua-funcref|
+5. Blob userdata		|lua-blob|
-6. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
+6. Funcref userdata		|lua-funcref|
-7. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+7. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
-8. The luaeval function		|lua-luaeval|
+8. Window userdata		|lua-window|
-9. Dynamic loading		|lua-dynamic|
+9. luaeval() Vim function	|lua-luaeval|
+10. Dynamic loading		|lua-dynamic|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{only available when Vim was compiled with the |+lua| feature}
-
-The Lua interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
-|+lua| feature.
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Commands						*lua-commands*
 
 							*:lua*
 :[range]lua {chunk}
-			Execute Lua chunk {chunk}.    {not in Vi}
+			Execute Lua chunk {chunk}.
 
 Examples:
 >
@@ -37,7 +35,7 @@ Examples:
 :[range]lua << {endmarker}
 {script}
 {endmarker}
-			Execute Lua script {script}.  {not in Vi}
+			Execute Lua script {script}.
 			Note: This command doesn't work when the Lua
 			feature wasn't compiled in.  To avoid errors, see
 			|script-here|.
@@ -74,7 +72,6 @@ If you use LuaJIT you can also use this: >
 			If the value returned by the function is a string it
 			becomes the text of the line in the current turn. The
 			default for [range] is the whole file: "1,$".
-							{not in Vi}
 
 Examples:
 >
@@ -88,7 +85,7 @@ Examples:
 
 							*:luafile*
 :[range]luafile {file}
-			Execute Lua script in {file}. {not in Vi}
+			Execute Lua script in {file}.
 			The whole argument is used as a single file name.
 
 Examples:
@@ -140,6 +137,14 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 				    :echo luaeval('vim.dict(t)')
 				    :" {'1': 3.141593, '2': v:false,
 				    :" 'say': 'hi'}
+<
+	vim.blob([arg])		Returns an empty blob or, if "arg" is a Lua
+				string, returns a blob b such that b is
+				equivalent to "arg" as a byte string.
+				Examples: >
+				    :lua s = "12ab\x00\x80\xfe\xff"
+				    :echo luaeval('vim.blob(s)')
+				    :" 0z31326162.0080FEFF
 <
 	vim.funcref({name})	Returns a Funcref to function {name} (see
 				|Funcref|). It is equivalent to Vim's
@@ -260,7 +265,34 @@ Examples:
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-5. Funcref userdata					*lua-funcref*
+5. Blob userdata					*lua-blob*
+
+Blob userdata represent vim blobs. A blob "b" has the following properties:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#b" is the length of blob "b", equivalent to "len(b)" in Vim.
+	o "b[k]" returns the k-th item in "b"; "b" is zero-indexed, as in Vim.
+	    To modify the k-th item, simply do "b[k] = number"; in particular,
+	    "b[#b] = number" can append a byte to tail.
+
+Methods
+-------
+	o "b:add(bytes)" appends "bytes" to the end of "b".
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:let b = 0z001122
+	:lua b = vim.eval('b') -- same 'b'
+	:lua print(b, b[0], #b)
+	:lua b[1] = 32
+	:lua b[#b] = 0x33 -- append a byte to tail
+	:lua b:add("\x80\x81\xfe\xff")
+	:echo b
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+6. Funcref userdata					*lua-funcref*
 
 Funcref userdata represent funcref variables in Vim. Funcrefs that were
 defined with a "dict" attribute need to be obtained as a dictionary key
@@ -293,7 +325,7 @@ Examples:
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*
+7. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*
 
 Buffer userdata represent vim buffers. A buffer userdata "b" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -345,7 +377,7 @@ Examples:
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. Window userdata					*lua-window*
+8. Window userdata					*lua-window*
 
 Window objects represent vim windows. A window userdata "w" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -377,7 +409,7 @@ Examples:
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-8. The luaeval function					*lua-luaeval* *lua-eval*
+9. luaeval() Vim function				*lua-luaeval* *lua-eval*
 
 The (dual) equivalent of "vim.eval" for passing Lua values to Vim is
 "luaeval". "luaeval" takes an expression string and an optional argument and
@@ -390,10 +422,10 @@ returns the result of the expression. It is semantically equivalent in Lua to:
 	end
 <
 Note that "_A" receives the argument to "luaeval". Lua numbers, strings, and
-list, dict, and funcref userdata are converted to their Vim respective types,
+list, dict, blob, and funcref userdata are converted to their Vim respective
-while Lua booleans are converted to numbers. An error is thrown if conversion
+types, while Lua booleans are converted to numbers. An error is thrown if
-of any of the remaining Lua types, including userdata other than lists, dicts,
+conversion of any of the remaining Lua types, including userdata other than
-and funcrefs, is attempted.
+lists, dicts, blobs, and funcrefs, is attempted.
 
 Examples: >
 
@@ -408,7 +440,7 @@ Examples: >
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-9. Dynamic loading				    *lua-dynamic*
+10. Dynamic loading				    *lua-dynamic*
 
 On MS-Windows and Unix the Lua library can be loaded dynamically.  The
 |:version| output then includes |+lua/dyn|.

runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Oct 08
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -15,10 +15,7 @@ The MzScheme Interface to Vim				*mzscheme* *MzScheme*
 7. Dynamic loading			|mzscheme-dynamic|
 8. MzScheme setup			|mzscheme-setup|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{only available when Vim was compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature}
-
-The MzScheme interface is available only if Vim was compiled with the
-|+mzscheme| feature.
 
 Based on the work of Brent Fulgham.
 Dynamic loading added by Sergey Khorev
@@ -40,7 +37,7 @@ To speed up the process, you might also want to use --disable-gracket and
 
 							*:mzscheme* *:mz*
 :[range]mz[scheme] {stmt}
-			Execute MzScheme statement {stmt}.  {not in Vi}
+			Execute MzScheme statement {stmt}.
 
 :[range]mz[scheme] << {endmarker}
 {script}
@@ -51,7 +48,7 @@ To speed up the process, you might also want to use --disable-gracket and
 			|script-here|.
 
 							*:mzfile* *:mzf*
-:[range]mzf[ile] {file}	Execute the MzScheme script in {file}.  {not in Vi}
+:[range]mzf[ile] {file}	Execute the MzScheme script in {file}.
 
 All of these commands do essentially the same thing - they execute a piece of
 MzScheme code, with the "current range" set to the given line

runtime/doc/if_ole.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -12,10 +12,8 @@ The OLE Interface to Vim				*ole-interface*
 4. Registration			|ole-registration|
 5. MS Visual Studio integration	|MSVisualStudio|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{only available when compiled with the |+ole| feature.  See
-
+src/if_ole.INSTALL}
-OLE is only available when compiled with the |+ole| feature.  See
-src/if_ole.INSTALL.
 An alternative is using the client-server communication |clientserver|.
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 29
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -11,9 +11,7 @@ Perl and Vim				*perl* *Perl*
 3. Using the Perl interface		|perl-using|
 4. Dynamic loading			|perl-dynamic|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{only available when Vim was compiled with the |+perl| feature}
-
-The Perl interface only works when Vim was compiled with the |+perl| feature.
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Editing Perl files					*perl-editing*

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Jan 30
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -19,8 +19,6 @@ The Python Interface to Vim				*python* *Python*
 11. Python X					|python_x|
 12. Building with Python support		|python-building|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
-
 The Python 2.x interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
 |+python| feature.
 The Python 3 interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
@@ -76,7 +74,6 @@ and "EOF" do not have any indent.
 			None. If a string is returned, it becomes the text of
 			the line in the current turn. The default for [range]
 			is the whole file: "1,$".
-			{not in Vi}
 
 Examples:
 >
@@ -98,7 +95,7 @@ python. For example: >
 							*:pyfile* *:pyf*
 :[range]pyf[ile] {file}
 			Execute the Python script in {file}.  The whole
-			argument is used as a single file name.  {not in Vi}
+			argument is used as a single file name.
 
 Both of these commands do essentially the same thing - they execute a piece of
 Python code, with the "current range" |python-range| set to the given line

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 29
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@ The Ruby Interface to Vim				*ruby* *Ruby*
 3. Vim::Buffer objects		|ruby-buffer|
 4. Vim::Window objects		|ruby-window|
 5. Global variables		|ruby-globals|
-6. Dynamic loading		|ruby-dynamic|
+6. rubyeval() Vim function	|ruby-rubyeval|
+7. Dynamic loading		|ruby-dynamic|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 			*E266* *E267* *E268* *E269* *E270* *E271* *E272* *E273*
 
-The Ruby interface only works when Vim was compiled with the |+ruby| feature.
+{only available when Vim was compiled with the |+ruby| feature}
 
 The home page for ruby is http://www.ruby-lang.org/.  You can find links for
 downloading Ruby there.
@@ -198,7 +198,16 @@ $curwin		The current window object.
 $curbuf		The current buffer object.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Dynamic loading					*ruby-dynamic*
+6. rubyeval() Vim function				*ruby-rubyeval*
+
+To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |rubyeval()| function to
+evaluate Ruby expressions and pass their values to Vim script.
+
+The Ruby value "true", "false" and "nil" are converted to v:true, v:false and
+v:null, respectively.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Dynamic loading					*ruby-dynamic*
 
 On MS-Windows and Unix the Ruby library can be loaded dynamically.  The
 |:version| output then includes |+ruby/dyn|.

runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2016 Jan 01
+*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ingo Wilken
@@ -16,9 +16,8 @@ The Tcl Interface to Vim				*tcl* *Tcl* *TCL*
 8. Examples				|tcl-examples|
 9. Dynamic loading			|tcl-dynamic|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands} *E280*
+*E280*
-
+{only available when Vim was compiled with the |+tcl| feature}
-The Tcl interface only works when Vim was compiled with the |+tcl| feature.
 
 WARNING: There are probably still some bugs.  Please send bug reports,
 comments, ideas etc to <Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de>
@@ -66,12 +65,11 @@ To see what version of Tcl you have: >
 			possible to add or delete lines using this command.
 			If {cmd} returns an error, the command is interrupted.
 			The default for [range] is the whole file: "1,$".
-			See |tcl-var-line| and |tcl-var-lnum|.  {not in Vi}
+			See |tcl-var-line| and |tcl-var-lnum|.
 
 							*:tclfile* *:tclf*
 :tclf[ile] {file}	Execute the Tcl script in {file}.  This is the same as
 			":tcl source {file}", but allows file name completion.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 
 Note that Tcl objects (like variables) persist from one command to the next,

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 22
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -544,10 +544,8 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-]|	CTRL-W CTRL-]	   same as "CTRL-W ]"
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-^|	CTRL-W CTRL-^	   same as "CTRL-W ^"
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-_|	CTRL-W CTRL-_	   same as "CTRL-W _"
-|CTRL-W_quote|	CTRL-W "	   terminal window: paste register
 |CTRL-W_+|	CTRL-W +	   increase current window height N lines
 |CTRL-W_-|	CTRL-W -	   decrease current window height N lines
-|CTRL-W_.|	CTRL-W .	   terminal window: type CTRL-W
 |CTRL-W_:|	CTRL-W :	   same as |:|, edit a command line
 |CTRL-W_<|	CTRL-W <	   decrease current window width N columns
 |CTRL-W_=|	CTRL-W =	   make all windows the same height & width
@@ -556,7 +554,6 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_J|	CTRL-W J	   move current window to the very bottom
 |CTRL-W_K|	CTRL-W K	   move current window to the very top
 |CTRL-W_L|	CTRL-W L	   move current window to the far right
-|CTRL-W_N|	CTRL-W N	   terminal window: go to Terminal Normal mode
 |CTRL-W_P|	CTRL-W P	   go to preview window
 |CTRL-W_R|	CTRL-W R	   rotate windows upwards N times
 |CTRL-W_S|	CTRL-W S	   same as "CTRL-W s"
@@ -586,6 +583,8 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_gF|	CTRL-W g F	   edit file name under the cursor in a new
 				   tab page and jump to the line number
 				   following the file name.
+|CTRL-W_gt|	CTRL-W g t	   same as `gt`: go to next tab page
+|CTRL-W_gT|	CTRL-W g T	   same as `gT`: go to previous tab page
 |CTRL-W_h|	CTRL-W h	   go to Nth left window (stop at first window)
 |CTRL-W_i|	CTRL-W i	   split window and jump to declaration of
 				   identifier under the cursor
@@ -863,6 +862,10 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 				   position the cursor at the start (left
 				   side) of the screen
 |zt|		zt		   redraw, cursor line at top of window
+|zuw|		zuw		   undo |zw|
+|zug|		zug		   undo |zg|
+|zuW|		zuW		   undo |zW|
+|zuG|		zuG		   undo |zG|
 |zv|		zv		   open enough folds to view the cursor line
 |zw|		zw		   mark word as wrong (bad) spelled word
 |zx|		zx		   re-apply 'foldlevel' and do "zv"
@@ -875,7 +878,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 
 These can be used after an operator, but before a {motion} has been entered.
 
-tag		char		action in Insert mode	~
+tag		char		action in Operator-pending mode	~
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
 |o_v|		v		force operator to work characterwise
 |o_V|		V		force operator to work linewise
@@ -1003,7 +1006,7 @@ Normal characters are inserted at the current cursor position.
 "Completion" below refers to context-sensitive completion.  It will complete
 file names, tags, commands etc. as appropriate.
 
-tag		command	      action in Command-line editing mode	~
+tag		command		action in Command-line editing mode	~
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 		CTRL-@		not used
 |c_CTRL-A|	CTRL-A		do completion on the pattern in front of the
@@ -1043,10 +1046,11 @@ tag		command	      action in Command-line editing mode	~
 				command-line from history.
 |c_CTRL-Q|	CTRL-Q		same as CTRL-V, unless it's used for terminal
 				control flow
-|c_CTRL-R|	CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*:= CTRL-F CTRL-P CTRL-W CTRL-A}
+|c_CTRL-R|	CTRL-R {regname}
 				insert the contents of a register or object
 				under the cursor as if typed
-|c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*:= CTRL-F CTRL-P CTRL-W CTRL-A}
+|c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| CTRL-R CTRL-R {regname}
+|c_CTRL-R_CTRL-O| CTRL-R CTRL-O {regname}
 				insert the contents of a register or object
 				under the cursor literally
 		CTRL-S		(used for terminal control flow)
@@ -1100,16 +1104,19 @@ Most Normal mode commands except for window commands (|CTRL-W|) do not work in
 a terminal window. Switch to Terminal-Normal mode to use them.
 This assumes 'termwinkey' is not set.
 
-tag		char		action in Insert mode	~
+tag		char		action in Terminal-Job mode	~
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
 |t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	switch to Terminal-Normal mode
-|CTRL-W_N|	CTRL-W N	switch to Terminal-Normal mode
+|t_CTRL-W_N|	CTRL-W N	switch to Terminal-Normal mode
-|CTRL-W_:|	CTRL-W :	enter an Ex command
+|t_CTRL-W_:|	CTRL-W :	enter an Ex command
-|CTRL-W_.|	CTRL-W .	type CTRL-W in the terminal
+|t_CTRL-W_.|	CTRL-W .	type CTRL-W in the terminal
 		CTRL-W CTRL-\	send a CTRL-\ to the job in the terminal
-|CTRL-W_quote|	CTRL-W " {0-9a-z"%#*:=}
+|t_CTRL-W_quote|  CTRL-W " {0-9a-z"%#*:=}
 				paste register in the terminal
 |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C| CTRL-W CTRL-C	forcefully ends the job
+|t_CTRL-W_CTRL-W| CTRL-W CTRL-W	move focus to the next window
+|t_CTRL-W_gt|	CTRL-W gt	go to next tabpage, same as `gt`
+|t_CTRL-W_gT|	CTRL-W gT	go to previous tabpage, same as `gT`
 
 You found it, Arthur!				*holy-grail* *:smile*
 
@@ -1120,7 +1127,7 @@ This is a brief but complete listing of all the ":" commands, without
 mentioning any arguments.  The optional part of the command name is inside [].
 The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 
-tag	      command	      action ~
+tag		command		action ~
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 |:!|		:!		filter lines or execute an external command
 |:!!|		:!!		repeat last ":!" command
@@ -1185,11 +1192,15 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:cNfile|	:cNf[ile]	go to last error in previous file
 |:cabbrev|	:ca[bbrev]	like ":abbreviate" but for Command-line mode
 |:cabclear|	:cabc[lear]	clear all abbreviations for Command-line mode
+|:cabove|	:cabo[ve]	go to error above current line
 |:caddbuffer|	:cad[dbuffer]	add errors from buffer
 |:caddexpr|	:cadde[xpr]	add errors from expr
 |:caddfile|	:caddf[ile]	add error message to current quickfix list
+|:cafter|	:caf[ter]	go to error after current cursor
 |:call|		:cal[l]		call a function
 |:catch|	:cat[ch]	part of a :try command
+|:cbefore|	:cbef[ore]	go to error before current cursor
+|:cbelow|	:cbel[ow]	go to error below current line
 |:cbottom|	:cbo[ttom]	scroll to the bottom of the quickfix window
 |:cbuffer|	:cb[uffer]	parse error messages and jump to first error
 |:cc|		:cc		go to specific error
@@ -1347,12 +1358,16 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:lNext|	:lN[ext]	go to previous entry in location list
 |:lNfile|	:lNf[ile]	go to last entry in previous file
 |:list|		:l[ist]		print lines
+|:labove|	:lab[ove]	go to location above current line
 |:laddexpr|	:lad[dexpr]	add locations from expr
 |:laddbuffer|	:laddb[uffer]	add locations from buffer
 |:laddfile|	:laddf[ile]	add locations to current location list
+|:lafter|	:laf[ter]	go to location after current cursor
 |:last|		:la[st]		go to the last file in the argument list
 |:language|	:lan[guage]	set the language (locale)
 |:later|	:lat[er]	go to newer change, redo
+|:lbefore|	:lbef[ore]	go to location before current cursor
+|:lbelow|	:lbel[ow]	go to location below current line
 |:lbottom|	:lbo[ttom]	scroll to the bottom of the location window
 |:lbuffer|	:lb[uffer]	parse locations and jump to first location
 |:lcd|		:lc[d]		change directory locally
@@ -1544,7 +1559,8 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:sbrewind|	:sbr[ewind]	split window and go to first file in the
 				buffer list
 |:scriptnames|	:scr[iptnames]	list names of all sourced Vim scripts
-|:scriptencoding| :scripte[ncoding]	encoding used in sourced Vim script
+|:scriptencoding| :scripte[ncoding]  encoding used in sourced Vim script
+|:scriptversion|  :scriptv[ersion]   version of Vim script used
 |:scscope|	:scs[cope]	split window and execute cscope command
 |:set|		:se[t]		show or set options
 |:setfiletype|	:setf[iletype]	set 'filetype', unless it was set already
@@ -1619,6 +1635,8 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:tab|		:tab		create new tab when opening new window
 |:tag|		:ta[g]		jump to tag
 |:tags|		:tags		show the contents of the tag stack
+|:tcd|		:tcd		change directory for tab page
+|:tchdir|	:tch[dir]	change directory for tab page
 |:tcl|		:tc[l]		execute Tcl command
 |:tcldo|	:tcld[o]	execute Tcl command for each line
 |:tclfile|	:tclf[ile]	execute Tcl script file
@@ -1696,6 +1714,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:xmapclear|	:xmapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Visual mode
 |:xmap|		:xm[ap]		like ":map" but for Visual mode
 |:xmenu|	:xme[nu]	add menu for Visual mode
+|:xrestore|	:xr[estore]	restores the X server connection
 |:xnoremap|	:xn[oremap]	like ":noremap" but for Visual mode
 |:xnoremenu|	:xnoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Visual mode
 |:xunmap|	:xu[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Visual mode

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 29
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -59,23 +59,22 @@ CTRL-C		Quit insert mode, go back to Normal mode.  Do not check for
 		event.
 
 						*i_CTRL-@*
-CTRL-@		Insert previously inserted text and stop insert.  {Vi: only
+CTRL-@		Insert previously inserted text and stop insert.
-		when typed as first char, only up to 128 chars}
+
 						*i_CTRL-A*
-CTRL-A		Insert previously inserted text.  {not in Vi}
+CTRL-A		Insert previously inserted text.
 
 						*i_CTRL-H* *i_<BS>* *i_BS*
 <BS> or CTRL-H	Delete the character before the cursor (see |i_backspacing|
 		about joining lines).
 		See |:fixdel| if your <BS> key does not do what you want.
-		{Vi: does not delete autoindents}
+
 						*i_<Del>* *i_DEL*
 <Del>		Delete the character under the cursor.  If the cursor is at
 		the end of the line, and the 'backspace' option includes
 		"eol", delete the <EOL>; the next line is appended after the
 		current one.
 		See |:fixdel| if your <Del> key does not do what you want.
-		{not in Vi}
 						*i_CTRL-W*
 CTRL-W		Delete the word before the cursor (see |i_backspacing| about
 		joining lines).  See the section "word motions",
@@ -102,10 +101,10 @@ CTRL-K {char1} [char2]
 		key, the code for that key is inserted in <> form.  For
 		example, the string "<S-Space>" can be entered by typing
 		<C-K><S-Space> (two keys).  Neither char is considered for
-		mapping.  {not in Vi}
+		mapping.
 
-CTRL-N		Find next keyword (see |i_CTRL-N|).  {not in Vi}
+CTRL-N		Find next keyword (see |i_CTRL-N|).
-CTRL-P		Find previous keyword (see |i_CTRL-P|).  {not in Vi}
+CTRL-P		Find previous keyword (see |i_CTRL-P|).
 
 CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+:.-=}					*i_CTRL-R*
 		Insert the contents of a register.  Between typing CTRL-R and
@@ -142,7 +141,7 @@ CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+:.-=}					*i_CTRL-R*
 				converted to a String.
 				When append() or setline() is invoked the undo
 				sequence will be broken.
-		See |registers| about registers.  {not in Vi}
+		See |registers| about registers.
 
 CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R*
 		Insert the contents of a register.  Works like using a single
@@ -154,7 +153,7 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R*
 <		Options 'textwidth', 'formatoptions', etc. still apply.  If
 		you also want to avoid these, use CTRL-R CTRL-O, see below.
 		The '.' register (last inserted text) is still inserted as
-		typed.  {not in Vi}
+		typed.
 
 CTRL-R CTRL-O {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-O*
 		Insert the contents of a register literally and don't
@@ -163,31 +162,30 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-O {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-O*
 		insert the text above the current line, like with `P`.
 		Does not replace characters!
 		The '.' register (last inserted text) is still inserted as
-		typed.  {not in Vi}
+		typed.
 
 CTRL-R CTRL-P {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-P*
 		Insert the contents of a register literally and fix the
 		indent, like |[<MiddleMouse>|.
 		Does not replace characters!
 		The '.' register (last inserted text) is still inserted as
-		typed.  {not in Vi}
+		typed.
 
 						*i_CTRL-T*
 CTRL-T		Insert one shiftwidth of indent at the start of the current
 		line.  The indent is always rounded to a 'shiftwidth' (this is
-		vi compatible).  {Vi: only when in indent}
+		vi compatible).
 						*i_CTRL-D*
 CTRL-D		Delete one shiftwidth of indent at the start of the current
 		line.  The indent is always rounded to a 'shiftwidth' (this is
-		vi compatible).  {Vi: CTRL-D works only when used after
+		vi compatible).
-		autoindent}
 						*i_0_CTRL-D*
-0 CTRL-D	Delete all indent in the current line.  {Vi: CTRL-D works
+0 CTRL-D	Delete all indent in the current line.
-		only when used after autoindent}
+
 						*i_^_CTRL-D*
 ^ CTRL-D	Delete all indent in the current line.  The indent is
 		restored in the next line.  This is useful when inserting a
-		label.  {Vi: CTRL-D works only when used after autoindent}
+		label.
 
 						*i_CTRL-V*
 CTRL-V		Insert next non-digit literally.  For special keys, the
@@ -195,7 +193,7 @@ CTRL-V		Insert next non-digit literally.  For special keys, the
 		decimal, octal or hexadecimal value of a character
 		|i_CTRL-V_digit|.
 		The characters typed right after CTRL-V are not considered for
-		mapping.  {Vi: no decimal byte entry}
+		mapping.
 		Note: When CTRL-V is mapped (e.g., to paste text) you can
 		often use CTRL-Q instead |i_CTRL-Q|.
 
@@ -206,12 +204,12 @@ CTRL-Q		Same as CTRL-V.
 
 CTRL-X		Enter CTRL-X mode.  This is a sub-mode where commands can
 		be given to complete words or scroll the window.  See
-		|i_CTRL-X| and |ins-completion|. {not in Vi}
+		|i_CTRL-X| and |ins-completion|.
 
 						*i_CTRL-E*
-CTRL-E		Insert the character which is below the cursor.  {not in Vi}
+CTRL-E		Insert the character which is below the cursor.
 						*i_CTRL-Y*
-CTRL-Y		Insert the character which is above the cursor.  {not in Vi}
+CTRL-Y		Insert the character which is above the cursor.
 		Note that for CTRL-E and CTRL-Y 'textwidth' is not used, to be
 		able to copy characters from a long line.
 
@@ -228,7 +226,6 @@ CTRL-_		Switch between languages, as follows:
 		is set.
 		Please refer to |rileft.txt| for more information about
 		right-to-left mode.
-		{not in Vi}
 		Only if compiled with the |+rightleft| feature.
 
 						*i_CTRL-^*
@@ -248,14 +245,12 @@ CTRL-^		Toggle the use of typing language characters.
 		The language mappings are normally used to type characters
 		that are different from what the keyboard produces.  The
 		'keymap' option can be used to install a whole number of them.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 						*i_CTRL-]*
-CTRL-]		Trigger abbreviation, without inserting a character.  {not in
+CTRL-]		Trigger abbreviation, without inserting a character.
-		Vi}
 
 						*i_<Insert>*
-<Insert>	Toggle between Insert and Replace mode.  {not in Vi}
+<Insert>	Toggle between Insert and Replace mode.
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 						*i_backspacing*
@@ -277,7 +272,6 @@ For backwards compatibility the values "0", "1" and "2" are also allowed, see
 If the 'backspace' option does contain "eol" and the cursor is in column 1
 when one of the three keys is used, the current line is joined with the
 previous line.  This effectively deletes the <EOL> in front of the cursor.
-{Vi: does not cross lines, does not delete past start position of insert}
 
 						*i_CTRL-V_digit*
 With CTRL-V the decimal, octal or hexadecimal value of a character can be
@@ -379,8 +373,8 @@ CTRL-\ CTRL-O	like CTRL-O but don't move the cursor	     *i_CTRL-\_CTRL-O*
 CTRL-L		when 'insertmode' is set: go to Normal mode  *i_CTRL-L*
 CTRL-G u	break undo sequence, start new change	     *i_CTRL-G_u*
 CTRL-G U	don't break undo with next left/right cursor *i_CTRL-G_U*
-		movement (but only if the cursor stays
+		movement, if the cursor stays within
-		within same the line)
+		same the line
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 Note: If the cursor keys take you out of Insert mode, check the 'noesckeys'
@@ -519,15 +513,14 @@ The 'expandtab' option is off by default.  Note that in Replace mode, a single
 character is replaced with several spaces.  The result of this is that the
 number of characters in the line increases.  Backspacing will delete one
 space at a time.  The original character will be put back for only one space
-that you backspace over (the last one).  {Vi does not have the 'expandtab'
+that you backspace over (the last one).
-option}
 
 							*ins-smarttab*
 When the 'smarttab' option is on, a <Tab> inserts 'shiftwidth' positions at
 the beginning of a line and 'tabstop' positions in other places.  This means
 that often spaces instead of a <Tab> character are inserted.  When 'smarttab'
 is off, a <Tab> always inserts 'tabstop' positions, and 'shiftwidth' is only
-used for ">>" and the like.  {not in Vi}
+used for ">>" and the like.
 
 							*ins-softtabstop*
 When the 'softtabstop' option is non-zero, a <Tab> inserts 'softtabstop'
@@ -567,14 +560,13 @@ If the 'expandtab' option is on, a <Tab> will replace one character with
 several spaces.  The result of this is that the number of characters in the
 line increases.  Backspacing will delete one space at a time.  The original
 character will be put back for only one space that you backspace over (the
-last one).  {Vi does not have the 'expandtab' option}
+last one).
 
 ==============================================================================
 6. Virtual Replace mode		*vreplace-mode* *Virtual-Replace-mode*
 
 Enter Virtual Replace mode with the "gR" command in normal mode.
 {not available when compiled without the |+vreplace| feature}
-{Vi does not have Virtual Replace mode}
 
 Virtual Replace mode is similar to Replace mode, but instead of replacing
 actual characters in the file, you are replacing screen real estate, so that
@@ -642,6 +634,7 @@ and one of the CTRL-X commands.  You exit CTRL-X mode by typing a key that is
 not a valid CTRL-X mode command.  Valid keys are the CTRL-X command itself,
 CTRL-N (next), and CTRL-P (previous).
 
+To get the current completion information, |complete_info()| can be used.
 Also see the 'infercase' option if you want to adjust the case of the match.
 
 							*complete_CTRL-E*
@@ -1104,6 +1097,9 @@ items:
 	icase		when non-zero case is to be ignored when comparing
 			items to be equal; when omitted zero is used, thus
 			items that only differ in case are added
+	equal		when non-zero, always treat this item to be equal when
+			comparing. Which means, "equal=1" disables filtering
+			of this item.
 	dup		when non-zero this match will be added even when an
 			item with the same word is already present.
 	empty		when non-zero this match will be added even when it is
@@ -1111,10 +1107,10 @@ items:
 	user_data 	custom data which is associated with the item and
 			available in |v:completed_item|
 
-All of these except "icase", "dup" and "empty" must be a string.  If an item
+All of these except "icase", "equal", "dup" and "empty" must be a string.  If
-does not meet these requirements then an error message is given and further
+an item does not meet these requirements then an error message is given and
-items in the list are not used.  You can mix string and Dictionary items in
+further items in the list are not used.  You can mix string and Dictionary
-the returned list.
+items in the returned list.
 
 The "menu" item is used in the popup menu and may be truncated, thus it should
 be relatively short.  The "info" item can be longer, it will  be displayed in
@@ -1803,7 +1799,7 @@ I			Insert text before the first non-blank in the line
 			the last blank.
 
 							*gI*
-gI			Insert text in column 1 [count] times.  {not in Vi}
+gI			Insert text in column 1 [count] times.
 
 							*gi*
 gi			Insert text in the same position as where Insert mode
@@ -1814,19 +1810,16 @@ gi			Insert text in the same position as where Insert mode
 			but NOT for inserted/deleted characters.
 			When the |:keepjumps| command modifier is used the |'^|
 			mark won't be changed.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*o*
 o			Begin a new line below the cursor and insert text,
-			repeat [count] times.  {Vi: blank [count] screen
+			repeat [count] times.
-			lines}
 			When the '#' flag is in 'cpoptions' the count is
 			ignored.
 
 							*O*
 O			Begin a new line above the cursor and insert text,
-			repeat [count] times.  {Vi: blank [count] screen
+			repeat [count] times.
-			lines}
 			When the '#' flag is in 'cpoptions' the count is
 			ignored.
 
@@ -1881,7 +1874,6 @@ NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 			script, the insertion only starts after the function
 			or script is finished.
 			This command does not work from |:normal|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:stopi* *:stopinsert*
 :stopi[nsert]		Stop Insert mode as soon as possible.  Works like
@@ -1898,12 +1890,10 @@ NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 			Note that when using this command in a function or
 			script that the replacement will only start after
 			the function or script is finished.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:startgreplace*
 :startg[replace][!]	Just like |:startreplace|, but use Virtual Replace
 			mode, like with |gR|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. Inserting a file					*inserting-file*

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 07
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -34,9 +34,7 @@ It can be accessed from within Vim with the <Help> or <F1> key and with the
 is not located in the default place.  You can jump to subjects like with tags:
 Use CTRL-] to jump to a subject under the cursor, use CTRL-T to jump back.
 
-Throughout this manual the differences between Vi and Vim are mentioned in
+The differences between Vi and Vim are mentioned in |vi_diff.txt|.
-curly braces, like this: {Vi does not have on-line help}.  See |vi_diff.txt|
-for a summary of the differences between Vim and Vi.
 
 This manual refers to Vim on various machines.  There may be small differences
 between different computers and terminals.  Besides the remarks given in this
@@ -648,11 +646,7 @@ Ex		 :vi	  --	  --	 --	    --	      --
      the command.
    In the last case <Esc> may be the character defined with the 'wildchar'
    option, in which case it will start command-line completion.  You can
-   ignore that and type <Esc> again.  {Vi: when hitting <Esc> the command-line
+   ignore that and type <Esc> again.
-   is executed.  This is unexpected for most people; therefore it was changed
-   in Vim.  But when the <Esc> is part of a mapping, the command-line is
-   executed.  If you want the Vi behaviour also when typing <Esc>, use ":cmap
-   ^V<Esc> ^V^M"}
 *4 Go from Normal to Select mode by:
    - use the mouse to select text while 'selectmode' contains "mouse"
    - use a non-printable command to move the cursor while keeping the Shift
@@ -703,7 +697,6 @@ gQ			Switch to "Ex" mode like with "Q", but really behave
 			like typing ":" commands after another.  All command
 			line editing, completion etc. is available.
 			Use the ":vi" command |:visual| to exit "Ex" mode.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
 7. The window contents					*window-contents*
@@ -716,7 +709,6 @@ exceptions:
   character.
 - When inserting text in one window, other windows on the same text are not
   updated until the insert is finished.
-{Vi: The screen is not always updated on slow terminals}
 
 Lines longer than the window width will wrap, unless the 'wrap' option is off
 (see below).  The 'linebreak' option can be set to wrap at a blank character.
@@ -762,7 +754,6 @@ If there is a single line that is too long to fit in the window, this is a
 special situation.  Vim will show only part of the line, around where the
 cursor is.  There are no special characters shown, so that you can edit all
 parts of this line.
-{Vi: gives an "internal error" on lines that do not fit in the window}
 
 The '@' occasion in the 'highlight' option can be used to set special
 highlighting for the '@' and '~' characters.  This makes it possible to
@@ -777,7 +768,7 @@ that is not shown, the screen is scrolled horizontally.  The advantage of
 this method is that columns are shown as they are and lines that cannot fit
 on the screen can be edited.  The disadvantage is that you cannot see all the
 characters of a line at once.  The 'sidescroll' option can be set to the
-minimal number of columns to scroll.  {Vi: has no 'wrap' option}
+minimal number of columns to scroll.
 
 All normal ASCII characters are displayed directly on the screen.  The <Tab>
 is replaced with the number of spaces that it represents.  Other non-printing
@@ -809,16 +800,14 @@ command characters		'showcmd'	on	    off
 cursor position			'ruler'		off	    off
 
 The current mode is "-- INSERT --" or "-- REPLACE --", see |'showmode'|.  The
-command characters are those that you typed but were not used yet.  {Vi: does
+command characters are those that you typed but were not used yet.
-not show the characters you typed or the cursor position}
 
 If you have a slow terminal you can switch off the status messages to speed
 up editing:
 	:set nosc noru nosm
 
 If there is an error, an error message will be shown for at least one second
-(in reverse video).  {Vi: error messages may be overwritten with other
+(in reverse video).
-messages before you have a chance to read them}
 
 Some commands show how many lines were affected.  Above which threshold this
 happens can be controlled with the 'report' option (default 2).
@@ -831,7 +820,7 @@ Make it at least 40 characters wide to be able to read most messages on the
 last line.
 
 On most Unix systems, resizing the window is recognized and handled correctly
-by Vim.  {Vi: not ok}
+by Vim.
 
 ==============================================================================
 8. Definitions						*definitions*

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Dec 18
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ modes.
 			Map the key sequence {lhs} to {rhs} for the modes
 			where the map command applies.  Disallow mapping of
 			{rhs}, to avoid nested and recursive mappings.  Often
-			used to redefine a command.  {not in Vi}
+			used to redefine a command.
 
 
 :unm[ap]  {lhs}			|mapmode-nvo|		*:unm*  *:unmap*
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ modes.
 :cmapc[lear]			|mapmode-c|		*:cmapc*  *:cmapclear*
 :tmapc[lear]			|mapmode-t|		*:tmapc*  *:tmapclear*
 			Remove ALL mappings for the modes where the map
-			command applies.  {not in Vi}
+			command applies.
 			Use the <buffer> argument to remove buffer-local
 			mappings |:map-<buffer>|
 			Warning: This also removes the default mappings.
@@ -143,7 +143,6 @@ modes.
 :tma[p] {lhs}			|mapmode-t|		*:tmap_l*
 			List the key mappings for the key sequences starting
 			with {lhs} in the modes where the map command applies.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 These commands are used to map a key or key sequence to a string of
 characters.  You can use this to put command sequences under function keys,
@@ -160,7 +159,6 @@ decide if "aa" or "aaa" should be mapped.  This means that after typing "aa"
 that mapping won't get expanded yet, Vim is waiting for another character.
 If you type a space, then "foo" will get inserted, plus the space.  If you
 type "a", then "bar" will get inserted.
-{Vi does not allow ambiguous mappings}
 
 
 1.2 SPECIAL ARGUMENTS					*:map-arguments*
@@ -1016,45 +1014,40 @@ See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
 
 						*:norea* *:noreabbrev*
 :norea[bbrev] [<expr>] [<buffer>] [lhs] [rhs]
-			same as ":ab", but no remapping for this {rhs} {not
+			Same as ":ab", but no remapping for this {rhs}.
-			in Vi}
 
 						*:ca* *:cabbrev*
 :ca[bbrev] [<expr>] [<buffer>] [lhs] [rhs]
-			same as ":ab", but for Command-line mode only.  {not
+			Same as ":ab", but for Command-line mode only.
-			in Vi}
 
 						*:cuna* *:cunabbrev*
-:cuna[bbrev] {lhs}	same as ":una", but for Command-line mode only.  {not
+:cuna[bbrev] {lhs}	Same as ":una", but for Command-line mode only.
-			in Vi}
 
 						*:cnorea* *:cnoreabbrev*
 :cnorea[bbrev] [<expr>] [<buffer>] [lhs] [rhs]
 			same as ":ab", but for Command-line mode only and no
-			remapping for this {rhs} {not in Vi}
+			remapping for this {rhs}
 
 						*:ia* *:iabbrev*
 :ia[bbrev] [<expr>] [<buffer>] [lhs] [rhs]
-			same as ":ab", but for Insert mode only.  {not in Vi}
+			Same as ":ab", but for Insert mode only.
 
 						*:iuna* *:iunabbrev*
-:iuna[bbrev] {lhs}	same as ":una", but for insert mode only.  {not in
+:iuna[bbrev] {lhs}	Same as ":una", but for insert mode only.
-			Vi}
 
 						*:inorea* *:inoreabbrev*
 :inorea[bbrev] [<expr>] [<buffer>] [lhs] [rhs]
-			same as ":ab", but for Insert mode only and no
+			Same as ":ab", but for Insert mode only and no
-			remapping for this {rhs} {not in Vi}
+			remapping for this {rhs}.
 
 							*:abc* *:abclear*
-:abc[lear] [<buffer>]	Remove all abbreviations.  {not in Vi}
+:abc[lear] [<buffer>]	Remove all abbreviations.
 
 							*:iabc* *:iabclear*
-:iabc[lear] [<buffer>]	Remove all abbreviations for Insert mode.  {not in Vi}
+:iabc[lear] [<buffer>]	Remove all abbreviations for Insert mode.
 
 							*:cabc* *:cabclear*
-:cabc[lear] [<buffer>]	Remove all abbreviations for Command-line mode.  {not
+:cabc[lear] [<buffer>]	Remove all abbreviations for Command-line mode.
-			in Vi}
 
 							*using_CTRL-V*
 It is possible to use special characters in the rhs of an abbreviation.
@@ -1147,8 +1140,7 @@ to find out what they are defined to.
 The |:scriptnames| command can be used to see which scripts have been sourced
 and what their <SNR> number is.
 
-This is all {not in Vi} and {not available when compiled without the |+eval|
+This is all {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature}.
-feature}.
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. User-defined commands				*user-commands*
@@ -1193,9 +1185,10 @@ scripts.
 
 :com[mand]						*:com* *:command*
 			List all user-defined commands.  When listing commands,
-			the characters in the first two columns are
+			the characters in the first columns are:
 			    !	Command has the -bang attribute
 			    "	Command has the -register attribute
+			    |   Command has the -bar attribute
 			    b	Command is local to current buffer
 			(see below for details on attributes)
 			The list can be filtered on command name with
@@ -1390,7 +1383,7 @@ Possible attributes are:
 		    number.
 	-count=N    A count (default N) which is specified either in the line
 		    number position, or as an initial argument (like |:Next|).
-		    Specifying -count (without a default) acts like -count=0
+	-count	    acts like -count=0
 
 Note that -range=N and -count=N are mutually exclusive - only one should be
 specified.
@@ -1400,14 +1393,17 @@ It is possible that the special characters in the range like ., $ or % which
 by default correspond to the current line, last line and the whole buffer,
 relate to arguments, (loaded) buffers, windows or tab pages.
 
-Possible values are:
+Possible values are (second column is the short name used in listing):
-	-addr=lines		Range of lines (this is the default)
+    -addr=lines		  	Range of lines (this is the default for -range)
-	-addr=arguments		Range for arguments
+    -addr=arguments	  arg	Range for arguments
-	-addr=buffers		Range for buffers (also not loaded buffers)
+    -addr=buffers	  buf	Range for buffers (also not loaded buffers)
-	-addr=loaded_buffers	Range for loaded buffers
+    -addr=loaded_buffers  load	Range for loaded buffers
-	-addr=windows		Range for windows
+    -addr=windows	  win	Range for windows
-	-addr=tabs		Range for tab pages
+    -addr=tabs		  tab	Range for tab pages
-	-addr=other		other kind of range
+    -addr=quickfix	  qf	Range for quickfix entries
+    -addr=other		  ?	other kind of range; can use ".", "$" and "%"
+				as with "lines" (this is the default for
+				-count)
 
 
 Special cases ~

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Jan 21
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Apr 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -620,6 +620,21 @@ windows maintains a table of which groups of characters are required for a
 locale.  You have to specify all the fonts that a locale requires in the
 'guifontset' option.
 
+Setting the 'guifontset' option also means that all font names will be handled
+as a fontset name.  Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
+|:highlight| command.
+
+Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
+the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
+used.  In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
+including the commas.  It is not possible to specify alternative
+fontset names.
+This example works on many X11 systems: >
+	:set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
+<
+The fonts must match with the current locale.  If fonts for the character sets
+that the current locale uses are not included, setting 'guifontset' will fail.
+
 NOTE: The fontset always uses the current locale, even though 'encoding' may
 be set to use a different charset.  In that situation you might want to use
 'guifont' and 'guifontwide' instead of 'guifontset'.

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Dec 30
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -703,11 +703,13 @@ Or use ":set nocp".
 This happens when an Ex command with mandatory argument(s) was executed, but
 no argument has been specified.
 
-							*E474* *E475*  >
+							*E474* *E475* *E983*  >
   Invalid argument
   Invalid argument: {arg}
+  Duplicate argument: {arg}
 
-An Ex command has been executed, but an invalid argument has been specified.
+An Ex command or function has been executed, but an invalid argument has been
+specified.
 
 							*E488*  >
   Trailing characters
@@ -796,7 +798,6 @@ and the screen is about to be redrawn:
    like pressing <Space>.  This makes it impossible to select text though.
 -> For the GUI clicking the left mouse button in the last line works like
    pressing <Space>.
-{Vi: only ":" commands are interpreted}
 
 If you accidentally hit <Enter> or <Space> and you want to see the displayed
 text then use |g<|.  This only works when 'more' is set.
@@ -828,10 +829,10 @@ Type					effect ~
      G					down all the way, until the hit-enter
 					prompt
 
-     <BS> or k or <Up>			one line back (*)
+     <BS> or k or <Up>			one line back
-     u					up a page (half a screen) (*)
+     u					up a page (half a screen)
-     b or <PageUp>			back a screen (*)
+     b or <PageUp>			back a screen
-     g					back to the start (*)
+     g					back to the start
 
      q, <Esc> or CTRL-C			stop the listing
      :					stop the listing and enter a
@@ -840,13 +841,11 @@ Type					effect ~
 					the clipboard ("* and "+ registers)
     {menu-entry}			what the menu is defined to in
 					Cmdline-mode.
-    <LeftMouse> (**)			next page
+    <LeftMouse>				next page (*)
 
 Any other key causes the meaning of the keys to be displayed.
 
-(*)  backwards scrolling is {not in Vi}.  Only scrolls back to where messages
+(*) Clicking the left mouse button only works:
-     started to scroll.
-(**) Clicking the left mouse button only works:
      - For the GUI: in the last line of the screen.
      - When 'r' is included in 'mouse' (but then selecting text won't work).
 

runtime/doc/mlang.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 May 06
+*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ The basics are explained in the user manual: |usr_45.txt|.
 
 Also see |help-translated| for multi-language help.
 
-{Vi does not have any of these features}
 {not available when compiled without the |+multi_lang| feature}
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Dec 27
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ l		or					*l*
 			TEXT column (if possible).  Most other commands stay
 			in the same SCREEN column.  <Home> works like "1|",
 			which differs from "0" when the line starts with a
-			<Tab>.  {not in Vi}
+			<Tab>.
 
 							*^*
 ^			To the first non-blank character of the line.
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ $  or <End>		To the end of the line.  When a count is given also go
 
 							*g_*
 g_			To the last non-blank character of the line and
-			[count - 1] lines downward |inclusive|. {not in Vi}
+			[count - 1] lines downward |inclusive|.
 
 							*g0* *g<Home>*
 g0 or g<Home>		When lines wrap ('wrap' on): To the first character of
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ g0 or g<Home>		When lines wrap ('wrap' on): To the first character of
 			When lines don't wrap ('wrap' off): To the leftmost
 			character of the current line that is on the screen.
 			Differs from "0" when the first character of the line
-			is not on the screen.  {not in Vi}
+			is not on the screen.
 
 							*g^*
 g^			When lines wrap ('wrap' on): To the first non-blank
@@ -220,12 +220,11 @@ g^			When lines wrap ('wrap' on): To the first non-blank
 			When lines don't wrap ('wrap' off): To the leftmost
 			non-blank character of the current line that is on the
 			screen.  Differs from "^" when the first non-blank
-			character of the line is not on the screen.  {not in
+			character of the line is not on the screen.
-			Vi}
 
 							*gm*
 gm			Like "g0", but half a screenwidth to the right (or as
-			much as possible). {not in Vi}
+			much as possible).
 
 							*g$* *g<End>*
 g$ or g<End>		When lines wrap ('wrap' on): To the last character of
@@ -240,7 +239,6 @@ g$ or g<End>		When lines wrap ('wrap' on): To the last character of
 			instead of going to the end of the line.
 			When 'virtualedit' is enabled moves to the end of the
 			screen line.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*bar*
 |			To screen column [count] in the current line.
@@ -296,12 +294,12 @@ CTRL-N			[count] lines downward |linewise|.
 gk		or					*gk* *g<Up>*
 g<Up>			[count] display lines upward.  |exclusive| motion.
 			Differs from 'k' when lines wrap, and when used with
-			an operator, because it's not linewise.  {not in Vi}
+			an operator, because it's not linewise.
 
 gj		or					*gj* *g<Down>*
 g<Down>			[count] display lines downward.  |exclusive| motion.
 			Differs from 'j' when lines wrap, and when used with
-			an operator, because it's not linewise.  {not in Vi}
+			an operator, because it's not linewise.
 
 							*-*
 -  <minus>		[count] lines upward, on the first non-blank
@@ -320,11 +318,11 @@ _  <underscore>		[count] - 1 lines downward, on the first non-blank
 G			Goto line [count], default last line, on the first
 			non-blank character |linewise|.  If 'startofline' not
 			set, keep the same column.
-			G is a one of |jump-motions|.
+			G is one of the |jump-motions|.
 
 							*<C-End>*
 <C-End>			Goto line [count], default last line, on the last
-			character |inclusive|. {not in Vi}
+			character |inclusive|.
 
 <C-Home>	or					*gg* *<C-Home>*
 gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
@@ -342,7 +340,7 @@ gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
 			non-blank in the line |linewise|.  To compute the new
 			line number this formula is used:
 			    ({count} * number-of-lines + 99) / 100
-			See also 'startofline' option.  {not in Vi}
+			See also 'startofline' option.
 
 :[range]go[to] [count]					*:go* *:goto* *go*
 [count]go		Go to [count] byte in the buffer.  Default [count] is
@@ -352,7 +350,6 @@ gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
 			'fileformat' setting.
 			Also see the |line2byte()| function, and the 'o'
 			option in 'statusline'.
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the
 			|+byte_offset| feature}
 
@@ -412,9 +409,7 @@ WORD before the fold.
 
 Special case: "cw" and "cW" are treated like "ce" and "cE" if the cursor is
 on a non-blank.  This is because "cw" is interpreted as change-word, and a
-word does not include the following white space.  {Vi: "cw" when on a blank
+word does not include the following white space.
-followed by other blanks changes only the first blank; this is probably a
-bug, because "dw" deletes all the blanks}
 
 Another special case: When using the "w" motion in combination with an
 operator and the last word moved over is at the end of a line, the end of
@@ -516,7 +511,6 @@ including white space, the commands starting with "i" select an "inner" object
 without white space, or just the white space.  Thus the "inner" commands
 always select less text than the "a" commands.
 
-These commands are {not in Vi}.
 These commands are not available when the |+textobjects| feature has been
 disabled at compile time.
 Also see `gn` and `gN`, operating on the last search pattern.
@@ -780,7 +774,7 @@ m<  or  m>		Set the |'<| or |'>| mark.  Useful to change what the
 
 						*'A* *'0* *`A* *`0*
 '{A-Z0-9}  `{A-Z0-9}	To the mark {A-Z0-9} in the file where it was set (not
-			a motion command when in another file).  {not in Vi}
+			a motion command when in another file).
 
 						*g'* *g'a* *g`* *g`a*
 g'{mark}  g`{mark}
@@ -790,18 +784,17 @@ g'{mark}  g`{mark}
 <			jumps to the last known position in a file.  See
 			$VIMRUNTIME/vimrc_example.vim.
 			Also see |:keepjumps|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 						*:marks*
 :marks			List all the current marks (not a motion command).
 			The |'(|, |')|, |'{| and |'}| marks are not listed.
 			The first column has number zero.
-			{not in Vi}
+
 						*E283*
 :marks {arg}		List the marks that are mentioned in {arg} (not a
 			motion command).  For example: >
 				:marks aB
-<			to list marks 'a' and 'B'.  {not in Vi}
+<			to list marks 'a' and 'B'.
 
 							*:delm* *:delmarks*
 :delm[arks] {marks}	Delete the specified marks.  Marks that can be deleted
@@ -815,11 +808,9 @@ g'{mark}  g`{mark}
 			   :delmarks p-z      deletes marks in the range p to z
 			   :delmarks ^.[]     deletes marks ^ . [ ]
 			   :delmarks \"	      deletes mark "
-<			{not in Vi}
 
 :delm[arks]!		Delete all marks for the current buffer, but not marks
 			A-Z or 0-9.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 A mark is not visible in any way.  It is just a position in the file that is
 remembered.  Do not confuse marks with named registers, they are totally
@@ -838,12 +829,12 @@ deletes the lines from the cursor position to mark 't'.  Hint: Use mark 't' for
 Top, 'b' for Bottom, etc..  Lowercase marks are restored when using undo and
 redo.
 
-Uppercase marks 'A to 'Z include the file name.  {Vi: no uppercase marks} You
+Uppercase marks 'A to 'Z include the file name.  You can use them to jump from
-can use them to jump from file to file.  You can only use an uppercase mark
+file to file.  You can only use an uppercase mark with an operator if the mark
-with an operator if the mark is in the current file.  The line number of the
+is in the current file.  The line number of the mark remains correct, even if
-mark remains correct, even if you insert/delete lines or edit another file for
+you insert/delete lines or edit another file for a moment.  When the 'viminfo'
-a moment.  When the 'viminfo' option is not empty, uppercase marks are kept in
+option is not empty, uppercase marks are kept in the .viminfo file.  See
-the .viminfo file.  See |viminfo-file-marks|.
+|viminfo-file-marks|.
 
 Numbered marks '0 to '9 are quite different.  They can not be set directly.
 They are only present when using a viminfo file |viminfo-file|.  Basically '0
@@ -854,11 +845,11 @@ Numbered mark should be stored.  See |viminfo-file-marks|.
 
 							*'[* *`[*
 '[  `[			To the first character of the previously changed
-			or yanked text.  {not in Vi}
+			or yanked text.
 
 							*']* *`]*
 ']  `]			To the last character of the previously changed or
-			yanked text.  {not in Vi}
+			yanked text.
 
 After executing an operator the Cursor is put at the beginning of the text
 that was operated upon.  After a put command ("p" or "P") the cursor is
@@ -876,7 +867,7 @@ was made yet in the current file.
 '<  `<			To the first line or character of the last selected
 			Visual area in the current buffer.  For block mode it
 			may also be the last character in the first line (to
-			be able to define the block).  {not in Vi}.
+			be able to define the block).
 
 							*'>* *`>*
 '>  `>			To the last line or character of the last selected
@@ -884,7 +875,7 @@ was made yet in the current file.
 			may also be the first character of the last line (to
 			be able to define the block).  Note that 'selection'
 			applies, the position may be just after the Visual
-			area.  {not in Vi}.
+			area.
 
 							*''* *``*
 ''  ``			To the position before the latest jump, or where the
@@ -900,13 +891,12 @@ was made yet in the current file.
 			Only one position is remembered per buffer, not one
 			for each window.  As long as the buffer is visible in
 			a window the position won't be changed.
-			{not in Vi}.
 
 							*'^* *`^*
 '^  `^			To the position where the cursor was the last time
 			when Insert mode was stopped.  This is used by the
 			|gi| command.  Not set when the |:keepjumps| command
-			modifier was used.  {not in Vi}
+			modifier was used.
 
 							*'.* *`.*
 '.  `.			To the position where the last change was made.  The
@@ -916,30 +906,29 @@ was made yet in the current file.
 			command changed.  For example when inserting a word,
 			the position will be on the last character.
 			To jump to older changes use |g;|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*'(* *`(*
 '(  `(			To the start of the current sentence, like the |(|
-			command.  {not in Vi}
+			command.
 
 							*')* *`)*
 ')  `)			To the end of the current sentence, like the |)|
-			command.  {not in Vi}
+			command.
 
 							*'{* *`{*
 '{  `{			To the start of the current paragraph, like the |{|
-			command.  {not in Vi}
+			command.
 
 							*'}* *`}*
 '}  `}			To the end of the current paragraph, like the |}|
-			command.  {not in Vi}
+			command.
 
 These commands are not marks themselves, but jump to a mark:
 
 							*]'*
 ]'			[count] times to next line with a lowercase mark below
 			the cursor, on the first non-blank character in the
-			line. {not in Vi}
+			line.
 
 							*]`*
 ]`			[count] times to lowercase mark after the cursor. {not
@@ -948,11 +937,10 @@ These commands are not marks themselves, but jump to a mark:
 							*['*
 ['			[count] times to previous line with a lowercase mark
 			before the cursor, on the first non-blank character in
-			the line. {not in Vi}
+			the line.
 
 							*[`*
 [`			[count] times to lowercase mark before the cursor.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 
 :loc[kmarks] {command}					*:loc* *:lockmarks*
@@ -1021,7 +1009,7 @@ These commands are not marks themselves, but jump to a mark:
 
 A "jump" is a command that normally moves the cursor several lines away.  If
 you make the cursor "jump" the position of the cursor before the jump is
-remembered.  You can return to that position with the "''" and "``" command,
+remembered.  You can return to that position with the "''" and "``" commands,
 unless the line containing that position was changed or deleted.  The
 following commands are "jump" commands: "'", "`", "G", "/", "?", "n", "N",
 "%", "(", ")", "[[", "]]", "{", "}", ":s", ":tag", "L", "M", "H" and the
@@ -1030,23 +1018,19 @@ commands that start editing a new file.
 							*CTRL-O*
 CTRL-O			Go to [count] Older cursor position in jump list
 			(not a motion command).
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 <Tab>		or					*CTRL-I* *<Tab>*
 CTRL-I			Go to [count] newer cursor position in jump list
 			(not a motion command).
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*:ju* *:jumps*
 :ju[mps]		Print the jump list (not a motion command).
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*:cle* *:clearjumps*
 :cle[arjumps]		Clear the jump list of the current window.
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*jumplist*
@@ -1131,14 +1115,12 @@ g;			Go to [count] older position in change list.
 			positions go to the oldest change.
 			If there is no older change an error message is given.
 			(not a motion command)
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*g,* *E663*
 g,			Go to [count] newer cursor position in change list.
 			Just like |g;| but in the opposite direction.
 			(not a motion command)
-			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 When using a count you jump as far back or forward as possible.  Thus you can
@@ -1229,19 +1211,19 @@ remembered.
 
 						*[(*
 [(			go to [count] previous unmatched '('.
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 						*[{*
 [{			go to [count] previous unmatched '{'.
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 						*])*
 ])			go to [count] next unmatched ')'.
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 						*]}*
 ]}			go to [count] next unmatched '}'.
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 The above four commands can be used to go to the start or end of the current
 code block.  It is like doing "%" on the '(', ')', '{' or '}' at the other
@@ -1254,25 +1236,25 @@ bring you back to the switch statement.
 			similar structured language).  When not before the
 			start of a method, jump to the start or end of the
 			class.  When no '{' is found after the cursor, this is
-			an error.  |exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			an error.  |exclusive| motion.
 						*]M*
 ]M			Go to [count] next end of a method (for Java or
 			similar structured language).  When not before the end
 			of a method, jump to the start or end of the class.
 			When no '}' is found after the cursor, this is an
-			error. |exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			error. |exclusive| motion.
 						*[m*
 [m			Go to [count] previous start of a method (for Java or
 			similar structured language).  When not after the
 			start of a method, jump to the start or end of the
 			class.  When no '{' is found before the cursor this is
-			an error. |exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			an error. |exclusive| motion.
 						*[M*
 [M			Go to [count] previous end of a method (for Java or
 			similar structured language).  When not after the
 			end of a method, jump to the start or end of the
 			class.  When no '}' is found before the cursor this is
-			an error. |exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			an error. |exclusive| motion.
 
 The above two commands assume that the file contains a class with methods.
 The class definition is surrounded in '{' and '}'.  Each method in the class
@@ -1295,11 +1277,11 @@ Using "3[m" will jump to the start of the class.
 
 						*[#*
 [#			go to [count] previous unmatched "#if" or "#else".
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 						*]#*
 ]#			go to [count] next unmatched "#else" or "#endif".
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 These two commands work in C programs that contain #if/#else/#endif
 constructs.  It brings you to the start or end of the #if/#else/#endif where
@@ -1307,11 +1289,11 @@ the current line is included.  You can then use "%" to go to the matching line.
 
 						*[star* *[/*
 [*  or  [/		go to [count] previous start of a C comment "/*".
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 						*]star* *]/*
 ]*  or  ]/		go to [count] next end of a C comment "*/".
-			|exclusive| motion. {not in Vi}
+			|exclusive| motion.
 
 
 						*H*
@@ -1339,6 +1321,6 @@ L			To line [count] from bottom of window (default: Last
 <LeftMouse>		Moves to the position on the screen where the mouse
 			click is |exclusive|.  See also |<LeftMouse>|.  If the
 			position is in a status line, that window is made the
-			active window and the cursor is not moved.  {not in Vi}
+			active window and the cursor is not moved.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/netbeans.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 17
+*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur et al.
@@ -24,7 +24,6 @@ Vim NetBeans Protocol: a socket interface for Vim integration into an IDE.
     10.4. Obtaining the External Editor Module	|obtaining-exted|
     10.5. Setting up NetBeans to run with Vim	|netbeans-setup|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these features}
 {only available when compiled with the |+netbeans_intg| feature}
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/os_mac.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Jan 21
+*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Apr 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar et al.

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 21
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -78,24 +78,24 @@ N			Repeat the latest "/" or "?" [count] times in
 				4. the first non-blank word after the cursor,
 				   in the current line
 			Only whole keywords are searched for, like with the
-			command "/\<keyword\>".  |exclusive|  {not in Vi}
+			command "/\<keyword\>".  |exclusive| 
 			'ignorecase' is used, 'smartcase' is not.
 
 							*#*
 #			Same as "*", but search backward.  The pound sign
 			(character 163) also works.  If the "#" key works as
 			backspace, try using "stty erase <BS>" before starting
-			Vim (<BS> is CTRL-H or a real backspace).  {not in Vi}
+			Vim (<BS> is CTRL-H or a real backspace).
 
 							*gstar*
 g*			Like "*", but don't put "\<" and "\>" around the word.
 			This makes the search also find matches that are not a
-			whole word.  {not in Vi}
+			whole word.
 
 							*g#*
 g#			Like "#", but don't put "\<" and "\>" around the word.
 			This makes the search also find matches that are not a
-			whole word.  {not in Vi}
+			whole word.
 
 							*gd*
 gd			Goto local Declaration.  When the cursor is on a local
@@ -113,22 +113,21 @@ gd			Goto local Declaration.  When the cursor is on a local
 			searched use the commands listed in |include-search|.
 			After this command |n| searches forward for the next
 			match (not backward).
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*gD*
 gD			Goto global Declaration.  When the cursor is on a
 			global variable that is defined in the file, this
 			command will jump to its declaration.  This works just
 			like "gd", except that the search for the keyword
-			always starts in line 1.  {not in Vi}
+			always starts in line 1.
 
 							*1gd*
 1gd			Like "gd", but ignore matches inside a {} block that
-			ends before the cursor position. {not in Vi}
+			ends before the cursor position.
 
 							*1gD*
 1gD			Like "gD", but ignore matches inside a {} block that
-			ends before the cursor position. {not in Vi}
+			ends before the cursor position.
 
 							*CTRL-C*
 CTRL-C			Interrupt current (search) command.  Use CTRL-Break on
@@ -152,6 +151,17 @@ use <Esc> to abandon the search.
 All matches for the last used search pattern will be highlighted if you set
 the 'hlsearch' option.  This can be suspended with the |:nohlsearch| command.
 
+When 'shortmess' does not include the "S" flag, Vim will automatically show an
+index, on which the cursor is. This can look like this: >
+
+  [1/5]		Cursor is on first of 5 matches.
+  [1/>99]	Cursor is on first of more than 99 matches.
+  [>99/>99]	Cursor is after 99 match of more than 99 matches.
+  [?/??]	Unknown how many matches exists, generating the
+		statistics was aborted because of search timeout.
+
+Note: the count does not take offset into account.
+
 When no match is found you get the error: *E486* Pattern not found
 Note that for the |:global| command this behaves like a normal message, for Vi
 compatibility.  For the |:s| command the "e" flag can be used to avoid the
@@ -160,7 +170,7 @@ error message |:s_flags|.
 					*search-offset* *{offset}*
 These commands search for the specified pattern.  With "/" and "?" an
 additional offset may be given.  There are two types of offsets: line offsets
-and character offsets.  {the character offsets are not in Vi}
+and character offsets.
 
 The offset gives the cursor position relative to the found match:
     [num]	[num] lines downwards, in column 1
@@ -436,30 +446,28 @@ More explanation and examples below, follow the links.		*E64* *E871*
 	  multi ~
      'magic' 'nomagic'	matches of the preceding atom ~
 |/star|	*	\*	0 or more	as many as possible
-|/\+|	\+	\+	1 or more	as many as possible (*)
+|/\+|	\+	\+	1 or more	as many as possible
-|/\=|	\=	\=	0 or 1		as many as possible (*)
+|/\=|	\=	\=	0 or 1		as many as possible
-|/\?|	\?	\?	0 or 1		as many as possible (*)
+|/\?|	\?	\?	0 or 1		as many as possible
 
-|/\{|	\{n,m}	\{n,m}	n to m		as many as possible (*)
+|/\{|	\{n,m}	\{n,m}	n to m		as many as possible
-	\{n}	\{n}	n		exactly (*)
+	\{n}	\{n}	n		exactly
-	\{n,}	\{n,}	at least n	as many as possible (*)
+	\{n,}	\{n,}	at least n	as many as possible
-	\{,m}	\{,m}	0 to m		as many as possible (*)
+	\{,m}	\{,m}	0 to m		as many as possible
-	\{}	\{}	0 or more	as many as possible (same as *) (*)
+	\{}	\{}	0 or more	as many as possible (same as *)
 
-|/\{-|	\{-n,m}	\{-n,m}	n to m		as few as possible (*)
+|/\{-|	\{-n,m}	\{-n,m}	n to m		as few as possible
-	\{-n}	\{-n}	n		exactly (*)
+	\{-n}	\{-n}	n		exactly
-	\{-n,}	\{-n,}	at least n	as few as possible (*)
+	\{-n,}	\{-n,}	at least n	as few as possible
-	\{-,m}	\{-,m}	0 to m		as few as possible (*)
+	\{-,m}	\{-,m}	0 to m		as few as possible
-	\{-}	\{-}	0 or more	as few as possible (*)
+	\{-}	\{-}	0 or more	as few as possible
 
 							*E59*
-|/\@>|	\@>	\@>	1, like matching a whole pattern (*)
+|/\@>|	\@>	\@>	1, like matching a whole pattern
-|/\@=|	\@=	\@=	nothing, requires a match |/zero-width| (*)
+|/\@=|	\@=	\@=	nothing, requires a match |/zero-width|
-|/\@!|	\@!	\@!	nothing, requires NO match |/zero-width| (*)
+|/\@!|	\@!	\@!	nothing, requires NO match |/zero-width|
-|/\@<=|	\@<=	\@<=	nothing, requires a match behind |/zero-width| (*)
+|/\@<=|	\@<=	\@<=	nothing, requires a match behind |/zero-width|
-|/\@<!|	\@<!	\@<!	nothing, requires NO match behind |/zero-width| (*)
+|/\@<!|	\@<!	\@<!	nothing, requires NO match behind |/zero-width|
-
-(*) {not in Vi}
 
 
 Overview of ordinary atoms.				*/ordinary-atom*
@@ -488,7 +496,7 @@ More explanation and examples below, follow the links.
 |/\%c|	\%23c	\%23c	in column 23 |/zero-width|
 |/\%v|	\%23v	\%23v	in virtual column 23 |/zero-width|
 
-Character classes {not in Vi}:				*/character-classes*
+Character classes:					*/character-classes*
       magic   nomagic	matches ~
 |/\i|	\i	\i	identifier character (see 'isident' option)
 |/\I|	\I	\I	like "\i", but excluding digits
@@ -527,7 +535,7 @@ Character classes {not in Vi}:				*/character-classes*
 |/\b|	\b	\b	<BS>
 |/\n|	\n	\n	end-of-line
 |/~|	~	\~	last given substitute string
-|/\1|	\1	\1	same string as matched by first \(\) {not in Vi}
+|/\1|	\1	\1	same string as matched by first \(\)
 |/\2|	\2	\2	Like "\1", but uses second \(\)
 	   ...
 |/\9|	\9	\9	Like "\1", but uses ninth \(\)
@@ -605,20 +613,19 @@ overview.
 	character at a time.
 
 							*/\+*
-\+	Matches 1 or more of the preceding atom, as many as possible. {not in
+\+	Matches 1 or more of the preceding atom, as many as possible.
-	Vi}
 	Example		matches ~
 	^.\+$		any non-empty line
 	\s\+		white space of at least one character
 
 							*/\=*
-\=	Matches 0 or 1 of the preceding atom, as many as possible. {not in Vi}
+\=	Matches 0 or 1 of the preceding atom, as many as possible.
 	Example		matches ~
 	foo\=		"fo" and "foo"
 
 							*/\?*
 \?	Just like \=.  Cannot be used when searching backwards with the "?"
-	command. {not in Vi}
+	command.
 
 					*/\{* *E60* *E554* *E870*
 \{n,m}	Matches n to m of the preceding atom, as many as possible
@@ -632,7 +639,6 @@ overview.
 \{-n,}	matches at least n of the preceding atom, as few as possible
 \{-,m}	matches 0 to m of the preceding atom, as few as possible
 \{-}	matches 0 or more of the preceding atom, as few as possible
-	{Vi does not have any of these}
 
 	n and m are positive decimal numbers or zero
 								*non-greedy*
@@ -655,7 +661,7 @@ overview.
 	The } may optionally be preceded with a backslash: \{n,m\}.
 
 							*/\@=*
-\@=	Matches the preceding atom with zero width. {not in Vi}
+\@=	Matches the preceding atom with zero width.
 	Like "(?=pattern)" in Perl.
 	Example			matches ~
 	foo\(bar\)\@=		"foo" in "foobar"
@@ -675,7 +681,7 @@ overview.
 
 							*/\@!*
 \@!	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom does NOT match at the
-	current position. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
+	current position. |/zero-width|
 	Like "(?!pattern)" in Perl.
 	Example			matches ~
 	foo\(bar\)\@!		any "foo" not followed by "bar"
@@ -705,7 +711,7 @@ overview.
 
 							*/\@<=*
 \@<=	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom matches just before what
-	follows. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
+	follows. |/zero-width|
 	Like "(?<=pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	Example			matches ~
 	\(an\_s\+\)\@<=file	"file" after "an" and white space or an
@@ -749,7 +755,7 @@ overview.
 \@<!	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom does NOT match just
 	before what follows.  Thus this matches if there is no position in the
 	current or previous line where the atom matches such that it ends just
-	before what follows.  |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
+	before what follows.  |/zero-width|
 	Like "(?<!pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	The match with the preceding atom is made to end just before the match
 	with what follows, thus an atom that ends in ".*" will work.
@@ -765,7 +771,7 @@ overview.
 	slow.
 
 							*/\@>*
-\@>	Matches the preceding atom like matching a whole pattern. {not in Vi}
+\@>	Matches the preceding atom like matching a whole pattern.
 	Like "(?>pattern)" in Perl.
 	Example		matches ~
 	\(a*\)\@>a	nothing (the "a*" takes all the "a"'s, there can't be
@@ -844,7 +850,7 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 		/\(.\{-}\zsFab\)\{3}
 <	Finds the third occurrence of "Fab".
 	This cannot be followed by a multi. *E888*
-	{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature}
+	{not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature}
 							*/\ze*
 \ze	Matches at any position, and sets the end of the match there: The
 	previous char is the last char of the whole match. |/zero-width|
@@ -853,17 +859,17 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 	Example: "end\ze\(if\|for\)" matches the "end" in "endif" and
 	"endfor".
 	This cannot be followed by a multi. |E888|
-	{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature}
+	{not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature}
 
 						*/\%^* *start-of-file*
 \%^	Matches start of the file.  When matching with a string, matches the
-	start of the string. {not in Vi}
+	start of the string.
 	For example, to find the first "VIM" in a file: >
 		/\%^\_.\{-}\zsVIM
 <
 						*/\%$* *end-of-file*
 \%$	Matches end of the file.  When matching with a string, matches the
-	end of the string. {not in Vi}
+	end of the string.
 	Note that this does NOT find the last "VIM" in a file: >
 		/VIM\_.\{-}\%$
 <	It will find the next VIM, because the part after it will always
@@ -887,7 +893,7 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 
 						*/\%#* *cursor-position*
 \%#	Matches with the cursor position.  Only works when matching in a
-	buffer displayed in a window. {not in Vi}
+	buffer displayed in a window.
 	WARNING: When the cursor is moved after the pattern was used, the
 	result becomes invalid.  Vim doesn't automatically update the matches.
 	This is especially relevant for syntax highlighting and 'hlsearch'.
@@ -908,7 +914,6 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 <	Note that two dots are required to include mark 'e in the match.  That
 	is because "\%<'e" matches at the character before the 'e mark, and
 	since it's a |/zero-width| match it doesn't include that character.
-	{not in Vi}
 	WARNING: When the mark is moved after the pattern was used, the result
 	becomes invalid.  Vim doesn't automatically update the matches.
 	Similar to moving the cursor for "\%#" |/\%#|.
@@ -918,7 +923,7 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 \%<23l	Matches above a specific line (lower line number).
 \%>23l	Matches below a specific line (higher line number).
 	These three can be used to match specific lines in a buffer.  The "23"
-	can be any line number.  The first line is 1. {not in Vi}
+	can be any line number.  The first line is 1.
 	WARNING: When inserting or deleting lines Vim does not automatically
 	update the matches.  This means Syntax highlighting quickly becomes
 	wrong.
@@ -934,7 +939,7 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 	These three can be used to match specific columns in a buffer or
 	string.  The "23" can be any column number.  The first column is 1.
 	Actually, the column is the byte number (thus it's not exactly right
-	for multi-byte characters).  {not in Vi}
+	for multi-byte characters).
 	WARNING: When inserting or deleting text Vim does not automatically
 	update the matches.  This means Syntax highlighting quickly becomes
 	wrong.
@@ -956,7 +961,7 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 	The "23" can be any column number.  The first column is 1.
 	Note that some virtual column positions will never match, because they
 	are halfway through a tab or other character that occupies more than
-	one screen character.  {not in Vi}
+	one screen character.
 	WARNING: When inserting or deleting text Vim does not automatically
 	update highlighted matches.  This means Syntax highlighting quickly
 	becomes wrong.
@@ -979,7 +984,7 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on):
 	where ".*" matches zero characters.
 <
 
-Character classes: {not in Vi}
+Character classes:
 \i	identifier character (see 'isident' option)	*/\i*
 \I	like "\i", but excluding digits			*/\I*
 \k	keyword character (see 'iskeyword' option)	*/\k*
@@ -1039,7 +1044,7 @@ match ASCII characters, as indicated by the range.
 	*E51* *E54* *E55* *E872* *E873*
 
 \1      Matches the same string that was matched by	*/\1* *E65*
-	the first sub-expression in \( and \). {not in Vi}
+	the first sub-expression in \( and \).
 	Example: "\([a-z]\).\1" matches "ata", "ehe", "tot", etc.
 \2      Like "\1", but uses second sub-expression,	*/\2*
    ...							*/\3*
@@ -1051,7 +1056,6 @@ match ASCII characters, as indicated by the range.
 \%(\)	A pattern enclosed by escaped parentheses.	*/\%(\)* */\%(* *E53*
 	Just like \(\), but without counting it as a sub-expression.  This
 	allows using more groups and it's a little bit faster.
-	{not in Vi}
 
 x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 
@@ -1152,7 +1156,7 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	  backslash before it: "[xyz\]]", "[\^xyz]", "[xy\-z]" and "[xyz\\]".
 	  (Note: POSIX does not support the use of a backslash this way).  For
 	  ']' you can also make it the first character (following a possible
-	  "^"):  "[]xyz]" or "[^]xyz]" {not in Vi}.
+	  "^"):  "[]xyz]" or "[^]xyz]".
 	  For '-' you can also make it the first or last character: "[-xyz]",
 	  "[^-xyz]" or "[xyz-]".  For '\' you can also let it be followed by
 	  any character that's not in "^]-\bdertnoUux".  "[\xyz]" matches '\',
@@ -1161,7 +1165,7 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	- Omitting the trailing ] is not considered an error. "[]" works like
 	  "[]]", it matches the ']' character.
 	- The following translations are accepted when the 'l' flag is not
-	  included in 'cpoptions' {not in Vi}:
+	  included in 'cpoptions':
 		\e	<Esc>
 		\t	<Tab>
 		\r	<CR>	(NOT end-of-line!)
@@ -1242,7 +1246,7 @@ files.  To match a <Nul> with a search pattern you can just enter CTRL-@ or
 "CTRL-V 000".  This is probably just what you expect.  Internally the
 character is replaced with a <NL> in the search pattern.  What is unusual is
 that typing CTRL-V CTRL-J also inserts a <NL>, thus also searches for a <Nul>
-in the file.  {Vi cannot handle <Nul> characters in the file at all}
+in the file.
 
 						*CR-used-for-NL*
 When 'fileformat' is "mac", <NL> characters in the file are stored as <CR>

runtime/doc/pi_gzip.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2016 Nov 06
+*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -13,8 +13,6 @@ This plugin is only available if 'compatible' is not set.
 You can avoid loading this plugin by setting the "loaded_gzip" variable: >
 	:let loaded_gzip = 1
 
-{Vi does not have any of this}
-
 ==============================================================================
 1. Autocommands						*gzip-autocmd*
 

runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Nov 03
+*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 	    ------------------------------------------------
 	    NETRW REFERENCE MANUAL    by Charles E. Campbell
@@ -114,8 +114,6 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2017 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
 13. Todo..................................................|netrw-todo|
 14. Credits...............................................|netrw-credits|
 
-{Vi does not have any of this}
-
 ==============================================================================
 2. Starting With Netrw					*netrw-start* {{{1
 
@@ -3504,7 +3502,7 @@ Example: Clear netrw's marked file list via a mapping on gu >
 			- Click "Add..."
 			- Set External Editor (adjust path as needed, include
 			  the quotes and !.! at the end):
-			    "c:\Program Files\Vim\vim70\gvim.exe" !.!
+			    "c:\Program Files\Vim\vim81\gvim.exe" !.!
 			- Check that the filetype in the box below is
 			  {asterisk}.{asterisk} (all files), or whatever types
 			  you want (cec: change {asterisk} to * ; I had to
@@ -3754,8 +3752,8 @@ by obtaining a copy of the latest (often developmental) netrw at:
 
 The <netrw.vim> script is typically installed on systems as something like:
 >
-	/usr/local/share/vim/vim7x/plugin/netrwPlugin.vim
+	/usr/local/share/vim/vim8x/plugin/netrwPlugin.vim
-	/usr/local/share/vim/vim7x/autoload/netrw.vim
+	/usr/local/share/vim/vim8x/autoload/netrw.vim
 		(see output of :echo &rtp)
 <
 which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).  If you

runtime/doc/popup.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+*popup.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 12
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+Displaying text with properties attached.	*popup* *popup-window*
+
+THIS IS UNDER DESIGN - ANYTHING MAY STILL CHANGE  
+
+1. Introduction			|popup-intro|
+2. Functions			|popup-functions|
+3. Examples			|popup-examples|
+
+
+{not able to use text properties when the |+textprop| feature was
+disabled at compile time}
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Introduction						*popup-intro*
+
+We are talking about popup windows here, text that goes on top of the buffer
+text and is under control of a plugin.  Other popup functionality:
+- popup menu, see |popup-menu|
+- balloon, see |balloon-eval|
+
+TODO
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Functions						*popup-functions*
+
+THIS IS UNDER DESIGN - ANYTHING MAY STILL CHANGE  
+
+Proposal and discussion on issue #4063: https://github.com/vim/vim/issues/4063
+
+[to be moved to eval.txt later]
+
+popup_show({lines}, {options})				*popup_show()*
+		Open a popup window showing {lines}, which is a list of lines,
+		where each line has text and text properties.
+
+		{options} is a dictionary with many possible entries.
+
+		Returns a unique ID to be used with |popup_close()|.
+
+		See |popup_show-usage| for details.
+
+
+popup_dialog({lines}, {options})			*popup_dialog()*
+		Just like |popup_show()| but with different default options:
+			pos		"center"
+			zindex		200
+			border		[]
+
+
+popup_notification({text}, {options})			 *popup_notification()*
+		Show the string {text} for 3 seconds at the top of the Vim
+		window.  This works like: >
+			call popup_show([{'text': {text}}], {
+				\ 'line': 1,
+				\ 'col': 10,
+				\ 'time': 3000,
+				\ 'zindex': 200,
+				\ 'highlight': 'WarningMsg',
+				\ 'border: [],
+				\ })
+<		Use {options} to change the properties.
+
+popup_atcursor({text}, {options})			 *popup_atcursor()*
+		Show the string {text} above the cursor, and close it when the
+		cursor moves.  This works like: >
+			call popup_show([{'text': {text}}], {
+				\ 'line': 'cursor-1',
+				\ 'col': 'cursor',
+				\ 'zindex': 50,
+				\ 'moved': 'WORD',
+				\ })
+<		Use {options} to change the properties.
+
+
+popup_menu({lines}, {options})			 *popup_atcursor()*
+		Show the {lines} near the cursor, handle selecting one of the
+		items with cursorkeys, and close it an item is selected with
+		Space or Enter.  This works like: >
+			call popup_show({lines}, {
+				\ 'pos': 'center',
+				\ 'zindex': 200,
+				\ 'wrap': 0,
+				\ 'border': [],
+				\ 'filter': 'popup_filter_menu',
+				\ })
+<		Use {options} to change the properties.  Should at least set
+		"callback" to a function that handles the selected item.
+
+
+popup_move({id}, {options})					*popup_move()*
+		Move popup {id} to the position speficied with {options}.
+		{options} may contain the items from |popup_show()| that
+		specify the popup position: "line", "col", "pos", "maxheight",
+		"minheight", "maxwidth" and "minwidth".
+
+
+popup_filter_menu({id}, {key})				*popup_filter_menu()*
+		Filter that can be used for a popup. It handles the cursor
+		keys to move the selected index in the popup. Space and Enter
+		can be used to select an item.  Invokes the "callback" of the
+		popup menu with the index of the selected line as the second
+		argument.
+
+
+popup_filter_yesno({id}, {key})				*popup_filter_yesno()*
+		Filter that can be used for a popup. It handles only the keys
+		'y', 'Y' and 'n' or 'N'.  Invokes the "callback" of the
+		popup menu with the 1 for 'y' or 'Y' and zero for 'n' or 'N'
+		as the second argument.  Pressing Esc and CTRL-C works like
+		pressing 'n'.
+
+
+popup_setlines({id}, {lnum}, {lines})			*popup_setlines()*
+		In popup {id} set line {lnum} and following to {lines}.
+
+		{lnum} is one-based and must be either an existing line or
+		just one below the last line, in which case the line gets
+		appended.
+
+		{lines} has the same format as one item in {lines} of
+		|popup_show()|.  Existing lines are replaced. When {lines}
+		extends below the last line of the popup lines are appended.
+
+popup_getlines({id})					*popup_getlines()*
+		Return the {lines} for popup {id}.
+
+
+popup_setoptions({id}, {options})			*popup_setoptions()*
+		Override options in popup {id} with entries in {options}.
+
+
+popup_getoptions({id})					*popup_getoptions()*
+		Return the {options} for popup {id}.
+
+
+popup_close({id})					*popup_close()*
+		Close popup {id}.
+
+
+POPUP_SHOW() ARGUMENTS					*popup_show-usage*
+
+The first argument of |popup_show()| is a list of text lines.  Each item in
+the list is a dictionary with these entries:
+	text		The text to display.
+	props		A list of text properties.  Optional.
+			Each entry is a dictionary, like the third argument of
+			|prop_add()|, but specifying the column in the
+			dictionary with a "col" entry, see below:
+			|popup-props|.
+
+The second argument of |popup_show()| is a dictionary with options:
+	line		screen line where to position the popup; can use
+			"cursor", "cursor+1" or "cursor-1" to use the line of
+			the cursor and add or subtract a number of lines;
+			default is "cursor-1".
+	col		screen column where to position the popup; can use
+			"cursor" to use the column of the cursor, "cursor+99"
+			and "cursor-99" to add or subtract a number of
+			columns; default is "cursor"
+	pos		"topleft", "topright", "botleft" or "botright":
+			defines what corner of the popup "line" and "col" are
+			used for.  Default is "botleft".  Alternatively
+			"center" can be used to position the popup somewhere
+			near the cursor.
+	maxheight	maximum height
+	minheight	minimum height
+	maxwidth	maximum width
+	minwidth	minimum width
+	title		text to be displayed above the first item in the
+			popup, on top of any border
+	wrap		TRUE to make the lines wrap (default TRUE)
+	highlight	highlight group name to use for the text, defines the
+			background and foreground color
+	border		list with numbers, defining the border thickness
+			above/right/below/left of the popup; an empty list
+			uses a border of 1 all around
+	borderhighlight	highlight group name to use for the border
+	borderchars	list with characters, defining the character to use
+			for the top/right/bottom/left border; optionally
+			followed by the character to use for the
+			topright/botright/botleft/topleft corner; an empty
+			list can be used to show a double line all around
+	zindex		priority for the popup, default 50
+	time		time in milliseconds after which the popup will close;
+			when omitted |popup_close()| must be used.
+	moved		"cell": close the popup if the cursor moved at least
+			one screen cell; "word" allows for moving within
+			|<cword>|, "WORD" allows for moving within |<cWORD>|,
+			a list with two numbers specifies the start and end
+			column
+	filter		a callback that can filter typed characters, see 
+			|popup-filter|
+	callback	a callback to be used when the popup closes, e.g. when
+			using |popup_filter_menu()|, see |popup-callback|.
+
+Depending on the "zindex" the popup goes under or above other popups.  The
+completion menu (|popup-menu|) has zindex 100.  For messages that occur for a
+short time the suggestion is to use zindex 1000.
+
+By default text wraps, which causes a line in {lines} to occupy more than one
+screen line.  When "wrap" is FALSE then the text outside of the popup or
+outside of the Vim window will not be displayed, thus truncated.
+
+
+POPUP TEXT PROPERTIES					*popup-props*
+
+These are similar to the third argument of |prop_add()|, but not exactly the
+same, since they only apply to one line.
+	col		starting column, counted in bytes, use one for the
+			first column.
+	length		length of text in bytes; can be zero
+	end_col		column just after the text; not used when "length" is
+			present; when {col} and "end_col" are equal, this is a
+			zero-width text property
+	id		user defined ID for the property; when omitted zero is
+			used
+	type		name of the text property type, as added with
+			|prop_type_add()|
+	transparent	do not show these characters, show the text under it;
+			if there is an border character to the right or below
+			it will be made transparent as well
+
+
+POPUP FILTER						*popup-filter*
+
+A callback that gets any typed keys while a popup is displayed.  It can return
+TRUE to indicate the key has been handled and is to be discarded, or FALSE to
+let Vim handle the key as usual in the current state.
+
+The filter function is called with two arguments: the ID of the popup and the
+key.
+
+Some common key actions:
+	Esc		close the popup
+	cursor keys	select another entry
+	Tab		accept current suggestion
+
+Vim provides standard filters |popup_filter_menu()| and
+|popup_filter_yesno()|.
+
+
+POPUP CALLBACK						*popup-callback*
+
+A callback that is invoked when the popup closes.  Used by
+|popup_filter_menu()|.  Invoked with two arguments: the ID of the popup and
+the result, which would usually be an index in the popup lines, or whatever
+the filter wants to pass.
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Examples						*popup-examples*
+
+TODO
+
+Prompt the user to press y/Y or n/N: >
+
+	func MyDialogHandler(id, result)
+	   if a:result
+	      " ... 'y' or 'Y' was pressed
+	   endif
+	endfunc
+
+	call popup_show([{'text': 'Continue? y/n'}], {
+		\ 'filter': 'popup_filter_yesno',
+		\ 'callback': 'MyDialogHandler',
+		\ })
+<
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/print.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*print.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*print.txt*     For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ Printing						*printing*
 7. PostScript Utilities			|postscript-print-util|
 8. Formfeed Characters			|printing-formfeed|
 
-{Vi has None of this}
 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| feature}
 
 ==============================================================================
@@ -254,9 +253,9 @@ possible.  The following tables show the valid combinations:
   Japanese	JIS_C_1978	   x	   x
 		JIS_X_1983	   x	   x
 		JIS_X_1990	   x		  x	  x
-		MSWINDOWS	   x
+		MSWINDOWS		   x
-		KANJITALK6	   x
+		KANJITALK6		   x
-		KANJITALK7	   x
+		KANJITALK7		   x
 
 				euc-kr	 cp949	ucs-2	utf-8 ~
   Korean	KS_X_1992	   x

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 13
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -16,8 +16,6 @@ This subject is introduced in section |30.1| of the user manual.
 8. The directory stack			|quickfix-directory-stack|
 9. Specific error file formats		|errorformats|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
-
 The quickfix commands are not available when the |+quickfix| feature was
 disabled at compile time.
 
@@ -87,7 +85,7 @@ processing a quickfix or location list command, it will be aborted.
 
 							*:cc*
 :cc[!] [nr]		Display error [nr].  If [nr] is omitted, the same
-			error is displayed again.  Without [!] this doesn't
+:[nr]cc[!]		error is displayed again.  Without [!] this doesn't
 			work when jumping to another buffer, the current buffer
 			has been changed, there is the only window for the
 			buffer and both 'hidden' and 'autowrite' are off.
@@ -96,10 +94,13 @@ processing a quickfix or location list command, it will be aborted.
 			there is another window for this buffer.
 			The 'switchbuf' settings are respected when jumping
 			to a buffer.
+			When used in the quickfix window the line number can
+			be used, including "." for the current line and "$"
+			for the last line.
 
 							*:ll*
 :ll[!] [nr]		Same as ":cc", except the location list for the
-			current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
+:[nr]ll[!]		current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
 
 							*:cn* *:cnext* *E553*
 :[count]cn[ext][!]	Display the [count] next error in the list that
@@ -123,6 +124,64 @@ processing a quickfix or location list command, it will be aborted.
 			list for the current window is used instead of the
 			quickfix list.
 
+							*:cabo* *:cabove*
+:[count]cabo[ve]	Go to the [count] error above the current line in the
+			current buffer.  If [count] is omitted, then 1 is
+			used.  If there are no errors, then an error message
+			is displayed.  Assumes that the entries in a quickfix
+			list are sorted by their buffer number and line
+			number. If there are multiple errors on the same line,
+			then only the first entry is used.  If [count] exceeds
+			the number of entries above the current line, then the
+			first error in the file is selected.
+
+							*:lab* *:labove*
+:[count]lab[ove]	Same as ":cabove", except the location list for the
+			current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
+
+							*:cbel* *:cbelow*
+:[count]cbel[ow]	Go to the [count] error below the current line in the
+			current buffer.  If [count] is omitted, then 1 is
+			used.  If there are no errors, then an error message
+			is displayed.  Assumes that the entries in a quickfix
+			list are sorted by their buffer number and line
+			number.  If there are multiple errors on the same
+			line, then only the first entry is used.  If [count]
+			exceeds the number of entries below the current line,
+			then the last error in the file is selected.
+
+							*:lbel* *:lbelow*
+:[count]lbel[ow]	Same as ":cbelow", except the location list for the
+			current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
+
+							*:cbe* *:cbefore*
+:[count]cbe[fore]	Go to the [count] error before the current cursor
+			position in the current buffer.  If [count] is
+			omitted, then 1 is used.  If there are no errors, then
+			an error message is displayed.  Assumes that the
+			entries in a quickfix list are sorted by their buffer,
+			line and column numbers.  If [count] exceeds the
+			number of entries before the current position, then
+			the first error in the file is selected.
+
+							*:lbe* *:lbefore*
+:[count]lbe[fore]	Same as ":cbefore", except the location list for the
+			current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
+
+							*:caf* *:cafter*
+:[count]caf[ter]	Go to the [count] error after the current cursor
+			position in the current buffer.  If [count] is
+			omitted, then 1 is used.  If there are no errors, then
+			an error message is displayed.  Assumes that the
+			entries in a quickfix list are sorted by their buffer,
+			line and column numbers.  If [count] exceeds the
+			number of entries after the current position, then
+			the last error in the file is selected.
+
+							*:laf* *:lafter*
+:[count]laf[ter]	Same as ":cafter", except the location list for the
+			current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
+
 							*:cnf* *:cnfile*
 :[count]cnf[ile][!]	Display the first error in the [count] next file in
 			the list that includes a file name.  If there are no
@@ -441,7 +500,6 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 			autocommand event is disabled by adding it to
 			'eventignore'.  This considerably speeds up editing
 			each buffer.
-			{not in Vi}
 			Also see |:bufdo|, |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:windo|,
 			|:ldo|, |:cfdo| and |:lfdo|.
 
@@ -454,7 +512,6 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 				:{cmd}
 				etc.
 <			Otherwise it works the same as `:cdo`.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ldo*
 :ld[o][!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each valid entry in the location list
@@ -467,7 +524,6 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 				etc.
 <			Only valid entries in the location list are used.
 			Otherwise it works the same as `:cdo`.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:lfdo*
 :lfdo[!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each file in the location list for
@@ -479,7 +535,29 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 				:{cmd}
 				etc.
 <			Otherwise it works the same as `:ldo`.
-			{not in Vi}
+
+FILTERING A QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
+				    *cfilter-plugin* *:Cfilter* *:Lfilter*
+If you have too many entries in a quickfix list, you can use the cfilter
+plugin to reduce the number of entries.  Load the plugin with: >
+
+    packadd cfilter
+
+Then you can use the following commands to filter a quickfix/location list: >
+
+    :Cfilter[!] /{pat}/
+    :Lfilter[!] /{pat}/
+
+The |:Cfilter| command creates a new quickfix list from the entries matching
+{pat} in the current quickfix list. {pat} is a Vim |regular-expression|
+pattern. Both the file name and the text of the entries are matched against
+{pat}. If the optional ! is supplied, then the entries not matching {pat} are
+used. The pattern can be optionally enclosed using one of the following
+characters: ', ", /. If the pattern is empty, then the last used search
+pattern is used.
+
+The |:Lfilter| command does the same as |:Cfilter| but operates on the current
+location list.
 
 =============================================================================
 2. The error window					*quickfix-window*
@@ -496,6 +574,7 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 			second quickfix window.  If [height] is given the
 			existing window will be resized to it.
 
+							*quickfix-buffer*
 			The window will contain a special buffer, with
 			'buftype' equal to "quickfix".  Don't change this!
 			The window will have the w:quickfix_title variable set
@@ -504,7 +583,11 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 			status line if the value of 'statusline' is adjusted
 			properly. Whenever this buffer is modified by a
 			quickfix command or function, the |b:changedtick|
-			variable is incremented.
+			variable is incremented.  You can get the number of
+			this buffer using the getqflist() and getloclist()
+			functions by passing the 'qfbufnr' item. For a
+			location list, this buffer is wiped out when the
+			location list is removed.
 
 							*:lop* *:lopen*
 :lop[en] [height]	Open a window to show the location list for the
@@ -670,12 +753,18 @@ using these functions are below:
     " get the quickfix list window id
     :echo getqflist({'winid' : 0}).winid
 
+    " get the quickfix list window buffer number
+    :echo getqflist({'qfbufnr' : 0}).qfbufnr
+
     " get the context of the current location list
     :echo getloclist(0, {'context' : 0}).context
 
     " get the location list window id of the third window
     :echo getloclist(3, {'winid' : 0}).winid
 
+    " get the location list window buffer number of the third window
+    :echo getloclist(3, {'qfbufnr' : 0}).qfbufnr
+
     " get the file window id of a location list window (winnr: 4)
     :echo getloclist(4, {'filewinid' : 0}).filewinid
 <
@@ -756,14 +845,19 @@ lists.  They set one of the existing error lists as the current one.
 			the current window instead of the quickfix list.
 
 						*:chistory* *:chi*
-:chi[story]		Show the list of error lists.  The current list is
+:[count]chi[story]	Show the list of error lists.  The current list is
 			marked with ">".  The output looks like:
 				  error list 1 of 3; 43 errors ~
 				> error list 2 of 3; 0 errors ~
 				  error list 3 of 3; 15 errors ~
 
+			When [count] is given, then the count'th quickfix
+			list is made the current list. Example: >
+				" Make the 4th quickfix list current
+				:4chistory
+<
 						*:lhistory* *:lhi*
-:lhi[story]		Show the list of location lists, otherwise like
+:[count]lhi[story]	Show the list of location lists, otherwise like
 			`:chistory`.
 
 When adding a new error list, it becomes the current list.
@@ -1575,22 +1669,6 @@ The backslashes before the pipe character are required to avoid it to be
 recognized as a command separator.  The backslash before each space is
 required for the set command.
 
-				    *cfilter-plugin* *:Cfilter* *:Lfilter*
-If you have too many matching messages, you can use the cfilter plugin to
-reduce the number of entries.  Load the plugin with: >
-   packadd cfilter
-
-Then you can use these command: >
-   :Cfilter[!] /{pat}/
-   :Lfilter[!] /{pat}/
-
-:Cfilter creates a new quickfix list from entries matching {pat} in the
-current quickfix list. Both the file name and the text of the entries are
-matched against {pat}. If ! is supplied, then entries not matching {pat} are
-used.
-
-:Lfilter does the same as :Cfilter but operates on the current location list.
-
 =============================================================================
 8. The directory stack				*quickfix-directory-stack*
 

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 16
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Apr 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -600,6 +600,7 @@ In Insert or Command-line mode:
 Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'aleph'		  'al'	    ASCII code of the letter Aleph (Hebrew)
 'allowrevins'	  'ari'     allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode
+'altkeymap'	  'akm'	    obsolete option for Farsi
 'ambiwidth'	  'ambw'    what to do with Unicode chars of ambiguous width
 'antialias'	  'anti'    Mac OS X: use smooth, antialiased fonts
 'autochdir'	  'acd'     change directory to the file in the current window
@@ -699,6 +700,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'filetype'	  'ft'	    type of file, used for autocommands
 'fillchars'	  'fcs'     characters to use for displaying special items
 'fixendofline'	  'fixeol'  make sure last line in file has <EOL>
+'fkmap'		  'fk'	    obsolete option for Farsi
 'foldclose'	  'fcl'     close a fold when the cursor leaves it
 'foldcolumn'	  'fdc'     width of the column used to indicate folds
 'foldenable'	  'fen'     set to display all folds open
@@ -767,6 +769,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'keywordprg'	  'kp'	    program to use for the "K" command
 'langmap'	  'lmap'    alphabetic characters for other language mode
 'langmenu'	  'lm'	    language to be used for the menus
+'langnoremap'	  'lnr'	    do not apply 'langmap' to mapped characters
 'langremap'	  'lrm'	    do apply 'langmap' to mapped characters
 'laststatus'	  'ls'	    tells when last window has status lines
 'lazyredraw'	  'lz'	    don't redraw while executing macros
@@ -779,8 +782,6 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'listchars'	  'lcs'     characters for displaying in list mode
 'loadplugins'	  'lpl'     load plugin scripts when starting up
 'luadll'		    name of the Lua dynamic library
-'mzschemedll'		    name of the MzScheme dynamic library
-'mzschemegcdll'		    name of the MzScheme dynamic library for GC
 'macatsui'		    Mac GUI: use ATSUI text drawing
 'magic'			    changes special characters in search patterns
 'makeef'	  'mef'     name of the errorfile for ":make"
@@ -808,6 +809,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'mouseshape'	  'mouses'  shape of the mouse pointer in different modes
 'mousetime'	  'mouset'  max time between mouse double-click
 'mzquantum'	  'mzq'     the interval between polls for MzScheme threads
+'mzschemedll'		    name of the MzScheme dynamic library
+'mzschemegcdll'		    name of the MzScheme dynamic library for GC
 'nrformats'	  'nf'	    number formats recognized for CTRL-A command
 'number'	  'nu'	    print the line number in front of each line
 'numberwidth'	  'nuw'     number of columns used for the line number
@@ -916,6 +919,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'tabstop'	  'ts'	    number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses
 'tagbsearch'	  'tbs'     use binary searching in tags files
 'tagcase'	  'tc'      how to handle case when searching in tags files
+'tagfunc'	  'tfu'	    function to get list of tag matches
 'taglength'	  'tl'	    number of significant characters for a tag
 'tagrelative'	  'tr'	    file names in tag file are relative
 'tags'		  'tag'     list of file names used by the tag command

runtime/doc/recover.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*recover.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2014 Mar 27
+*recover.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -131,7 +131,6 @@ command:
 			flag is present in 'cpoptions' the swap file will not
 			be deleted for this buffer when Vim exits and the
 			buffer is still loaded |cpo-&|.
-			{Vi: might also exit}
 
 A Vim swap file can be recognized by the first six characters: "b0VIM ".
 After that comes the version number, e.g., "3.0".
@@ -196,7 +195,6 @@ recovered file.  Or use |:DiffOrig|.
 Once you are sure the recovery is ok delete the swap file.  Otherwise, you
 will continue to get warning messages that the ".swp" file already exists.
 
-{Vi: recovers in another way and sends mail if there is something to recover}
 
 
 ENCRYPTION AND THE SWAP FILE				*:recover-crypt*

runtime/doc/remote.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*remote.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2017 Nov 12
+*remote.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -10,8 +10,6 @@ Vim client-server communication				*client-server*
 2. X11 specific items		|x11-clientserver|
 3. MS-Windows specific items	|w32-clientserver|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
-
 ==============================================================================
 1. Common functionality					*clientserver*
 

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Dec 18
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -124,11 +124,11 @@ q{0-9a-zA-Z"}		Record typed characters into register {0-9a-zA-Z"}
 			used for |y| and |p| the result is most likely not
 			what is expected, because the put will paste the
 			recorded macro and the yank will overwrite the
-			recorded macro. {Vi: no recording}
+			recorded macro.
 
 q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 			stops recording is not stored in the register, unless
-			it was the result of a mapping)  {Vi: no recording}
+			it was the result of a mapping)
 
 							*@*
 @{0-9a-z".=*+}		Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*+} [count]
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 			applies.
 			For "@=" you are prompted to enter an expression.  The
 			result of the expression is then executed.
-			See also |@:|.  {Vi: only named registers}
+			See also |@:|.
 
 							*@@* *E748*
 @@			Repeat the previous @{0-9a-z":*} [count] times.
@@ -158,17 +158,16 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 			result of evaluating the expression is executed as an
 			Ex command.
 			Mappings are not recognized in these commands.
-			{Vi: only in some versions} Future: Will execute the
+			Future: Will execute the register for each line in the
-			register for each line in the address range.
+			address range.
 
 							*:@:*
 :[addr]@:		Repeat last command-line.  First set cursor at line
-			[addr] (default is current line).  {not in Vi}
+			[addr] (default is current line).
 
 :[addr]@							*:@@*
 :[addr]@@		Repeat the previous :@{0-9a-z"}.  First set cursor at
-			line [addr] (default is current line).  {Vi: only in
+			line [addr] (default is current line).
-			some versions}
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. Using Vim scripts					*using-scripts*
@@ -187,7 +186,6 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			|:bufdo|, in a loop or when another command follows
 			the display won't be updated while executing the
 			commands.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ru* *:runtime*
 :ru[ntime][!] [where] {file} ..
@@ -230,7 +228,6 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			when no file could be found.
 			When 'verbose' is two or higher, there is a message
 			about each searched file.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:pa* *:packadd* *E919*
 :pa[ckadd][!] {name}	Search for an optional plugin directory in 'packpath'
@@ -323,14 +320,25 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 				set encoding=utf-8
 				scriptencoding utf-8
 <
-			{not in Vi}
+
+:scriptv[ersion] {version}		*:scriptv* *:scriptversion*
+								*E999* *E984*
+			Specify the version of Vim for the lines that follow
+			in the same file.  Only applies at the toplevel of
+			sourced scripts, not inside functions.
+
+			If {version} is higher than what the current Vim
+			version supports E999 will be given.  You either need
+			to rewrite the script to make it work with an older
+			Vim version, or update Vim to a newer version.  See
+			|vimscript-version| for what changed between versions.
 
 						*:scr* *:scriptnames*
 :scr[iptnames]		List all sourced script names, in the order they were
 			first sourced.  The number is used for the script ID
 			|<SID>|.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
-			|+eval| feature}
+			feature}
 
 :scr[iptnames][!] {scriptId}			*:script*
 			Edit script {scriptId}.  Although ":scriptnames name"
@@ -346,7 +354,7 @@ For writing a Vim script, see chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
 			following the ":finally" up to the matching |:endtry|
 			are executed first.  This process applies to all
 			nested ":try"s in the script.  The outermost ":endtry"
-			then stops sourcing the script.  {not in Vi}
+			then stops sourcing the script.
 
 All commands and command sequences can be repeated by putting them in a named
 register and then executing it.  There are two ways to get the commands in the
@@ -686,7 +694,6 @@ sourced file or user function and set breakpoints.
 NOTE: The debugging mode is far from perfect.  Debugging will have side
 effects on how Vim works.  You cannot use it to debug everything.  For
 example, the display is messed up by the debugging messages.
-{Vi does not have a debug mode}
 
 An alternative to debug mode is setting the 'verbose' option.  With a bigger
 number it will give more verbose messages about what Vim is doing.
@@ -920,7 +927,6 @@ OBSCURE
 Profiling means that Vim measures the time that is spent on executing
 functions and/or scripts.  The |+profile| feature is required for this.
 It is only included when Vim was compiled with "huge" features.
-{Vi does not have profiling}
 
 You can also use the |reltime()| function to measure time.  This only requires
 the |+reltime| feature, which is present more often.

runtime/doc/rileft.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*rileft.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2006 Apr 24
+*rileft.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Avner Lottem
@@ -12,8 +12,6 @@ These functions were originally created by Avner Lottem:
    E-mail: alottem@iil.intel.com
    Phone:  +972-4-8307322
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
-
 								*E26*
 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature}
 

runtime/doc/scroll.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*scroll.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Apr 26
+*scroll.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -45,9 +45,6 @@ CTRL-D			Scroll window Downwards in the buffer.  The number of
 			difference).  When the cursor is on the last line of
 			the buffer nothing happens and a beep is produced.
 			See also 'startofline' option.
-			{difference from vi: Vim scrolls 'scroll' screen
-			lines, instead of file lines; makes a difference when
-			lines wrap}
 
 <S-Down>	or				*<S-Down>* *<kPageDown>*
 <PageDown>	or				*<PageDown>* *CTRL-F*
@@ -120,7 +117,7 @@ z<CR>			Redraw, line [count] at top of window (default
 
 							*zt*
 zt			Like "z<CR>", but leave the cursor in the same
-			column.  {not in Vi}
+			column.
 
 							*zN<CR>*
 z{height}<CR>		Redraw, make window {height} lines tall.  This is
@@ -136,7 +133,7 @@ z.			Redraw, line [count] at center of window (default
 							*zz*
 zz			Like "z.", but leave the cursor in the same column.
 			Careful: If caps-lock is on, this command becomes
-			"ZZ": write buffer and exit!  {not in Vi}
+			"ZZ": write buffer and exit!
 
 							*z-*
 z-			Redraw, line [count] at bottom of window (default
@@ -145,7 +142,6 @@ z-			Redraw, line [count] at bottom of window (default
 
 							*zb*
 zb			Like "z-", but leave the cursor in the same column.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. Scrolling horizontally				*scroll-horizontal*
@@ -158,26 +154,22 @@ not used.
 z<Right>    or						*zl* *z<Right>*
 zl			Move the view on the text [count] characters to the
 			right, thus scroll the text [count] characters to the
-			left.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.  {not in
+			left.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.
-			Vi}
 
 z<Left>      or						*zh* *z<Left>*
 zh			Move the view on the text [count] characters to the
 			left, thus scroll the text [count] characters to the
-			right.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.  {not in
+			right.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.
-			Vi}
 
 							*zL*
 zL			Move the view on the text half a screenwidth to the
 			right, thus scroll the text half a screenwidth to the
-			left.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.  {not in
+			left.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.
-			Vi}
 
 							*zH*
 zH			Move the view on the text half a screenwidth to the
 			left, thus scroll the text half a screenwidth to the
-			right.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.  {not in
+			right.  This only works when 'wrap' is off.
-			Vi}
 
 For the following two commands the cursor is not moved in the text, only the
 text scrolls on the screen.
@@ -185,12 +177,12 @@ text scrolls on the screen.
 							*zs*
 zs			Scroll the text horizontally to position the cursor
 			at the start (left side) of the screen.  This only
-			works when 'wrap' is off.  {not in Vi}
+			works when 'wrap' is off.
 
 							*ze*
 ze			Scroll the text horizontally to position the cursor
 			at the end (right side) of the screen.  This only
-			works when 'wrap' is off.  {not in Vi}
+			works when 'wrap' is off.
 
 ==============================================================================
 5. Scrolling synchronously				*scroll-binding*

runtime/doc/sign.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*sign.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 17
+*sign.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Sign Support Features				*sign-support*
 1. Introduction				|sign-intro|
 2. Commands				|sign-commands|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these features}
 {only available when compiled with the |+signs| feature}
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/spell.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*spell.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 19
+*spell.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -11,10 +11,7 @@ Spell checking						*spell*
 3. Generating a spell file	|spell-mkspell|
 4. Spell file format		|spell-file-format|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{not available when the |+syntax| feature has been disabled at compile time}
-
-Spell checking is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been disabled
-at compile time.
 
 Note: There also is a vimspell plugin.  If you have it you can do ":help
 vimspell" to find about it.  But you will probably want to get rid of the
@@ -312,25 +309,25 @@ Exceptions:
   spell file is used.
 
 For example, with these values:
-	'runtimepath' is "~/.vim,/usr/share/vim70,~/.vim/after"
+	'runtimepath' is "~/.vim,/usr/share/vim81,~/.vim/after"
 	'encoding'    is "iso-8859-2"
 	'spelllang'   is "pl"
 
 Vim will look for:
 1. ~/.vim/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.spl
-2. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.spl
+2. /usr/share/vim81/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.spl
 3. ~/.vim/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.add.spl
-4. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.add.spl
+4. /usr/share/vim81/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.add.spl
 5. ~/.vim/after/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.add.spl
 
 This assumes 1. is not found and 2. is found.
 
 If 'encoding' is "latin1" Vim will look for:
 1. ~/.vim/spell/pl.latin1.spl
-2. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.latin1.spl
+2. /usr/share/vim81/spell/pl.latin1.spl
 3. ~/.vim/after/spell/pl.latin1.spl
 4. ~/.vim/spell/pl.ascii.spl
-5. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.ascii.spl
+5. /usr/share/vim81/spell/pl.ascii.spl
 6. ~/.vim/after/spell/pl.ascii.spl
 
 This assumes none of them are found (Polish doesn't make sense when leaving

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 16
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -84,7 +84,6 @@ filename	One or more file names.  The first one will be the current
 		and the first error is displayed.  See |quickfix|.
 		If [errorfile] is not given, the 'errorfile' option is used
 		for the file name.  See 'errorfile' for the default value.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 (nothing)	Without one of the four items above, Vim will start editing a
 		new buffer.  It's empty and doesn't have a file name.
@@ -129,17 +128,17 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 
 --help							*-h* *--help* *-?*
 -?
--h		Give usage (help) message and exit.  {not in Vi}
+-h		Give usage (help) message and exit.
 		See |info-message| about capturing the text.
 
 							*--version*
 --version	Print version information and exit.  Same output as for
-		|:version| command.  {not in Vi}
+		|:version| command.
 		See |info-message| about capturing the text.
 
 							*--noplugin*
 --noplugin	Skip loading plugins.  Resets the 'loadplugins' option.
-		{not in Vi}
+
 		Note that the |-u| argument may also disable loading plugins:
 			argument   load: vimrc files  plugins  defaults.vim ~
 			(nothing)	     yes	yes	  yes
@@ -190,13 +189,11 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" arguments in a Vim
 		command.  They are executed in the order given.  A "-S"
 		argument counts as a "-c" argument as well.
-		{Vi only allows one command}
 
 --cmd {command}						*--cmd*
 		{command} will be executed before processing any vimrc file.
 		Otherwise it acts like -c {command}.  You can use up to 10 of
 		these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-S*
 -S {file}	The {file} will be sourced after the first file has been read.
@@ -205,7 +202,9 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 <		It can be mixed with "-c" arguments and repeated like "-c".
 		The limit of 10 "-c" arguments applies here as well.
 		{file} cannot start with a "-".
-		{not in Vi}
+
+		Do not use this for running a script to do some work and exit
+		Vim, you won't see error messages.  Use |-u| instead.
 
 -S		Works like "-S Session.vim".  Only when used as the last
 		argument or when another "-" option follows.
@@ -217,8 +216,7 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		|crash-recovery|.
 
 							*-L*
--L		Same as -r.  {only in some versions of Vi: "List recoverable
+-L		Same as -r.
-		edit sessions"}
 
 							*-R*
 -R		Readonly mode.  The 'readonly' option will be set for all the
@@ -238,7 +236,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 -m		Modifications not allowed to be written.  The 'write' option
 		will be reset, so that writing files is disabled.  However,
 		the 'write' option can be set to enable writing again.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-M*
 -M		Modifications not allowed.  The 'modifiable' option will be
@@ -246,7 +243,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		will be reset, so that writing files is disabled.  However,
 		the 'modifiable' and 'write' options can be set to enable
 		changes and writing.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 					*-Z* *restricted-mode* *E145* *E981*
 -Z		Restricted mode.  All commands that make use of an external
@@ -260,11 +256,9 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		the Safe module.
 		Note that the user may still find a loophole to execute a
 		shell command, it has only been made difficult.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-g*
 -g		Start Vim in GUI mode.  See |gui|. For the opposite see |-v|.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-v*
 -v		Start Ex in Vi mode.  Only makes a difference when the
@@ -278,7 +272,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 							*-E*
 -E		Start Vim in improved Ex mode |gQ|.  Only makes a difference
 		when the executable is not called "exim".
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-s-ex*
 -s		Silent or batch mode.  Only when Vim was started as "ex" or
@@ -302,6 +295,9 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		"-u" argument).
 		Example: >
 			vim -e -s  < thefilter  thefile
+<		For the opposite, to see errors from the script, execute the
+		file with the |-u| flag: >
+			vim -u thefilter thefile
 <
 							*-b*
 -b		Binary mode.  File I/O will only recognize <NL> to separate
@@ -309,7 +305,7 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		option is set to 0.  'modeline' is reset.  The 'binary' option
 		is set.  This is done after reading the vimrc/exrc files but
 		before reading any file in the arglist.  See also
-		|edit-binary|.  {not in Vi}
+		|edit-binary|.
 
 							*-l*
 -l		Lisp mode.  Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
@@ -318,7 +314,7 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 -A		Arabic mode.  Sets the 'arabic' option on.  (Only when
 		compiled with the |+arabic| features (which include
 		|+rightleft|), otherwise Vim gives an error message
-		and exits.)  {not in Vi}
+		and exits.)
 
 							*-F*
 -F		This was used for Farsi mode, which has been removed.
@@ -327,13 +323,13 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 							*-H*
 -H		Hebrew mode.  Sets the 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' options on.
 		(Only when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature, otherwise
-		Vim gives an error message and exits.)  {not in Vi}
+		Vim gives an error message and exits.)
 
 							*-V* *verbose*
 -V[N]		Verbose.  Sets the 'verbose' option to [N] (default: 10).
 		Messages will be given for each file that is ":source"d and
 		for reading or writing a viminfo file.  Can be used to find
-		out what is happening upon startup and exit.  {not in Vi}
+		out what is happening upon startup and exit.
 		Example: >
 			vim -V8 foobar
 
@@ -348,7 +344,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 -D		Debugging.  Go to debugging mode when executing the first
 		command from a script. |debug-mode|
 		{not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature}
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-C*
 -C		Compatible mode.  Sets the 'compatible' option.  You can use
@@ -360,13 +355,13 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 <		Several plugins won't work with 'compatible' set.  You may
 		want to set it after startup this way: >
 			vim "+set cp" filename
-<		Also see |compatible-default|.  {not in Vi}
+<		Also see |compatible-default|.
 
 							*-N*
 -N		Not compatible mode.  Resets the 'compatible' option.  You can
 		use this to get 'nocompatible', when there is no .vimrc file
 		or when using "-u NONE".
-		Also see |compatible-default|.  {not in Vi}
+		Also see |compatible-default|.
 
 							*-y* *easy*
 -y		Easy mode.  Implied for |evim| and |eview|.  Starts with
@@ -374,7 +369,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		This sources the script $VIMRUNTIME/evim.vim.  Mappings are
 		set up to work like most click-and-type editors, see
 		|evim-keys|.  The GUI is started when available.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-n*
 -n		No swap file will be used.  Recovery after a crash will be
@@ -394,7 +388,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		'updatecount' to very big numbers, and type ":preserve" when
 		you want to save your work.  This way you keep the possibility
 		for crash recovery.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-o*
 -o[N]		Open N windows, split horizontally.  If [N] is not given,
@@ -402,13 +395,11 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		there is not enough room, only the first few files get a
 		window.  If there are more windows than arguments, the last
 		few windows will be editing an empty file.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-O*
 -O[N]		Open N windows, split vertically.  Otherwise it's like -o.
 		If both the -o and the -O option are given, the last one on
 		the command line determines how the windows will be split.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-p*
 -p[N]		Open N tab pages.  If [N] is not given, one tab page is opened
@@ -416,20 +407,19 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		'tabpagemax' pages (default 10).  If there are more tab pages
 		than arguments, the last few tab pages will be editing an
 		empty file.  Also see |tabpage|.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-T*
 -T {terminal}	Set the terminal type to "terminal".  This influences the
 		codes that Vim will send to your terminal.  This is normally
 		not needed, because Vim will be able to find out what type
-		of terminal you are using.  (See |terminal-info|.)  {not in Vi}
+		of terminal you are using.  (See |terminal-info|.)
 
 							*--not-a-term*
 --not-a-term	Tells Vim that the user knows that the input and/or output is
 		not connected to a terminal.  This will avoid the warning and
 		the two second delay that would happen.
 		Also avoids the "Reading from stdin..." message.
-		{not in Vi}
+		Also avoids the "N files to edit" message.
 
 							*--ttyfail*
 --ttyfail	When the stdin or stdout is not a terminal (tty) then exit
@@ -437,8 +427,7 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 
 							*-d*
 -d		Start in diff mode, like |vimdiff|.
-		{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
+		{not available when compiled without the |+diff| feature}
-		feature}
 
 -d {device}	Only on the Amiga and when not compiled with the |+diff|
 		feature.  Works like "-dev".
@@ -448,7 +437,7 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		Normally you would use this to set the window position and
 		size: "-d con:x/y/width/height", e.g.,
 		"-d con:30/10/600/150".  But you can also use it to start
-		editing on another device, e.g., AUX:.  {not in Vi}
+		editing on another device, e.g., AUX:.
 							*-f*
 -f		GUI: Do not disconnect from the program that started Vim.
 		'f' stands for "foreground".  If omitted, the GUI forks a new
@@ -467,7 +456,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		MS-Windows: This option is not supported.  However, when
 		running Vim with an installed vim.bat or gvim.bat file it
 		works.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 
 							*--nofork*
@@ -499,7 +487,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		has the side effect that the 'compatible' option will be on by
 		default.  This can have unexpected effects.  See
 		|'compatible'|.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-U* *E230*
 -U {gvimrc}	The file {gvimrc} is read for initializations when the GUI
@@ -507,14 +494,12 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		is equal to "NONE", no file is read for GUI initializations at
 		all.  |gui-init|
 		Exception: Reading the system-wide menu file is always done.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-i*
 -i {viminfo}	The file "viminfo" is used instead of the default viminfo
 		file.  If the name "NONE" is used (all uppercase), no viminfo
 		file is read or written, even if 'viminfo' is set or when
 		":rv" or ":wv" are used.  See also |viminfo-file|.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*--clean*
 --clean		Similar to "-u DEFAULTS -U NONE -i NONE":
@@ -551,7 +536,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		When the connection is desired later anyway (e.g., for
 		client-server messages), call the |serverlist()| function.
 		This does not enable the XSMP handler though.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-s*
 -s {scriptin}	The script file "scriptin" is read.  The characters in the
@@ -560,7 +544,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		of the file is reached before the editor exits, further
 		characters are read from the keyboard.  Only works when not
 		started in Ex mode, see |-s-ex|.  See also |complex-repeat|.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-w_nr*
 -w {number}
@@ -573,62 +556,59 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		":source!".  When the "scriptout" file already exists, new
 		characters are appended.  See also |complex-repeat|.
 		{scriptout} cannot start with a digit.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-W*
 -W {scriptout}	Like -w, but do not append, overwrite an existing file.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 --remote [+{cmd}] {file} ...
 		Open the {file} in another Vim that functions as a server.
 		Any non-file arguments must come before this.
-		See |--remote|. {not in Vi}
+		See |--remote|.
 
 --remote-silent [+{cmd}] {file} ...
 		Like --remote, but don't complain if there is no server.
-		See |--remote-silent|. {not in Vi}
+		See |--remote-silent|.
 
 --remote-wait [+{cmd}] {file} ...
 		Like --remote, but wait for the server to finish editing the
 		file(s).
-		See |--remote-wait|. {not in Vi}
+		See |--remote-wait|.
 
 --remote-wait-silent [+{cmd}] {file} ...
 		Like --remote-wait, but don't complain if there is no server.
-		See |--remote-wait-silent|. {not in Vi}
+		See |--remote-wait-silent|.
 
 --servername {name}
 		Specify the name of the Vim server to send to or to become.
-		See |--servername|. {not in Vi}
+		See |--servername|.
 
 --remote-send {keys}
 		Send {keys} to a Vim server and exit.
-		See |--remote-send|. {not in Vi}
+		See |--remote-send|.
 
 --remote-expr {expr}
 		Evaluate {expr} in another Vim that functions as a server.
 		The result is printed on stdout.
-		See |--remote-expr|. {not in Vi}
+		See |--remote-expr|.
 
 --serverlist	Output a list of Vim server names and exit.  See
-		|--serverlist|. {not in Vi}
+		|--serverlist|.
 
 --socketid {id}						*--socketid*
 		GTK+ GUI Vim only.  Make gvim try to use GtkPlug mechanism, so
 		that it runs inside another window.  See |gui-gtk-socketid|
-		for details. {not in Vi}
+		for details.
 
 --windowid {id}						*--windowid*
 		Win32 GUI Vim only.  Make gvim try to use the window {id} as a
 		parent, so that it runs inside that window.  See
-		|gui-w32-windowid| for details. {not in Vi}
+		|gui-w32-windowid| for details.
 
 --echo-wid						*--echo-wid*
 		GTK+ GUI Vim only.  Make gvim echo the Window ID on stdout,
 		which can be used to run gvim in a kpart widget.  The format
 		of the output is: >
 			WID: 12345\n
-<		{not in Vi}
 
 --role {role}						*--role*
 		GTK+ 2 GUI only.  Set the role of the main window to {role}.
@@ -636,7 +616,6 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		identify a window, in order to restore window placement and
 		such.  The --role argument is passed automatically when
 		restoring the session on login.  See |gui-gnome-session|
-		{not in Vi}
 
 -P {parent-title}				*-P* *MDI* *E671* *E672*
 		Win32 only: Specify the title of the parent application.  When
@@ -1267,16 +1246,16 @@ vimrc file.
 							*:mk* *:mkexrc*
 :mk[exrc] [file]	Write current key mappings and changed options to
 			[file] (default ".exrc" in the current directory),
-			unless it already exists.  {not in Vi}
+			unless it already exists.
 
 :mk[exrc]! [file]	Always write current key mappings and changed
 			options to [file] (default ".exrc" in the current
-			directory).  {not in Vi}
+			directory).
 
 							*:mkv* *:mkvimrc*
 :mkv[imrc][!] [file]	Like ":mkexrc", but the default is ".vimrc" in the
 			current directory.  The ":version" command is also
-			written to the file.  {not in Vi}
+			written to the file.
 
 These commands will write ":map" and ":set" commands to a file, in such a way
 that when these commands are executed, the current key mappings and options
@@ -1342,8 +1321,7 @@ You can quickly start editing with a previously saved View or Session with the
 |-S| argument: >
 	vim -S Session.vim
 <
-All this is {not in Vi} and {not available when compiled without the
+All this is {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| feature}.
-|+mksession| feature}.
 
 							*:mks* *:mksession*
 :mks[ession][!] [file]	Write a Vim script that restores the current editing
@@ -1658,7 +1636,7 @@ most of the information will be restored).
 :rv[iminfo][!] [file]	Read from viminfo file [file] (default: see above).
 			If [!] is given, then any information that is
 			already set (registers, marks, |v:oldfiles|, etc.)
-			will be overwritten   {not in Vi}
+			will be overwritten
 
 			*:wv* *:wviminfo* *E137* *E138* *E574* *E886* *E929*
 :wv[iminfo][!] [file]	Write to viminfo file [file] (default: see above).
@@ -1671,7 +1649,6 @@ most of the information will be restored).
 			check that no old temp files were left behind (e.g.
 			~/.viminf*) and that you can write in the directory of
 			the .viminfo file.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 						*:ol* *:oldfiles*
 :ol[dfiles]		List the files that have marks stored in the viminfo
@@ -1681,8 +1658,7 @@ most of the information will be restored).
 			The output can be filtered with |:filter|, e.g.: >
 				filter /\.vim/ oldfiles
 <			The filtering happens on the file name.
-			{not in Vi, only when compiled with the |+eval|
+			{only when compiled with the |+eval| feature}
-			feature}
 
 :bro[wse] ol[dfiles][!]
 			List file names as with |:oldfiles|, and then prompt

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Dec 27
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1962,7 +1962,7 @@ The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
 the parentheses and backquoted parentheses.  Because of the quantity of
 colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
 specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
-usual colorscheme control using standard highlighting groups.  The actual
+usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups.  The actual
 highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting  (see |'bg'|).
 
 
@@ -4694,9 +4694,9 @@ in their own color.
 			Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
 			":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
 
-			To customize a colorscheme use another name, e.g.
+			To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
 			"~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
-			the original colorscheme: >
+			the original color scheme: >
 				runtime colors/evening.vim
 				hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
 
@@ -4704,7 +4704,7 @@ in their own color.
 			|ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
 			After the color scheme has been loaded the
 			|ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
-			For info about writing a colorscheme file: >
+			For info about writing a color scheme file: >
 				:edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
 
 :hi[ghlight]		List all the current highlight groups that have
@@ -4901,7 +4901,7 @@ ctermbg={color-nr}				*highlight-ctermbg*
 	explicitly.  This causes the highlight groups that depend on
 	'background' to change!  This means you should set the colors for
 	Normal first, before setting other colors.
-	When a colorscheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
+	When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
 	be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal).  First
 	delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
 
@@ -5002,6 +5002,8 @@ Conceal		placeholder characters substituted for concealed
 		text (see 'conceallevel')
 							*hl-Cursor*
 Cursor		the character under the cursor
+lCursor		the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
+		is used (see 'guicursor')
 							*hl-CursorIM*
 CursorIM	like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
 							*hl-CursorColumn*

runtime/doc/tabpage.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Mar 29
+*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ when used in combination with more than one tab page.
 4. Setting 'tabline'		|setting-tabline|
 5. Setting 'guitablabel'	|setting-guitablabel|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 {not able to use multiple tab pages when the |+windows| feature was disabled
 at compile time}
 
@@ -289,7 +288,6 @@ LOOPING OVER TAB PAGES:
 		current tab page.
 		{cmd} can contain '|' to concatenate several commands.
 		{cmd} must not open or close tab pages or reorder them.
-		{not in Vi}
 		Also see |:windo|, |:argdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|, |:cfdo|
 		and |:lfdo|
 

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -1075,6 +1075,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'tag'	options.txt	/*'tag'*
 'tagbsearch'	options.txt	/*'tagbsearch'*
 'tagcase'	options.txt	/*'tagcase'*
+'tagfunc'	options.txt	/*'tagfunc'*
 'taglength'	options.txt	/*'taglength'*
 'tagrelative'	options.txt	/*'tagrelative'*
 'tags'	options.txt	/*'tags'*
@@ -1101,6 +1102,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'textmode'	options.txt	/*'textmode'*
 'textwidth'	options.txt	/*'textwidth'*
 'tf'	options.txt	/*'tf'*
+'tfu'	options.txt	/*'tfu'*
 'tgc'	options.txt	/*'tgc'*
 'tgst'	options.txt	/*'tgst'*
 'thesaurus'	options.txt	/*'thesaurus'*
@@ -2133,17 +2135,25 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :cabbrev	map.txt	/*:cabbrev*
 :cabc	map.txt	/*:cabc*
 :cabclear	map.txt	/*:cabclear*
+:cabo	quickfix.txt	/*:cabo*
+:cabove	quickfix.txt	/*:cabove*
 :cad	quickfix.txt	/*:cad*
 :caddbuffer	quickfix.txt	/*:caddbuffer*
 :cadde	quickfix.txt	/*:cadde*
 :caddexpr	quickfix.txt	/*:caddexpr*
 :caddf	quickfix.txt	/*:caddf*
 :caddfile	quickfix.txt	/*:caddfile*
+:caf	quickfix.txt	/*:caf*
+:cafter	quickfix.txt	/*:cafter*
 :cal	eval.txt	/*:cal*
 :call	eval.txt	/*:call*
 :cat	eval.txt	/*:cat*
 :catch	eval.txt	/*:catch*
 :cb	quickfix.txt	/*:cb*
+:cbe	quickfix.txt	/*:cbe*
+:cbefore	quickfix.txt	/*:cbefore*
+:cbel	quickfix.txt	/*:cbel*
+:cbelow	quickfix.txt	/*:cbelow*
 :cbo	quickfix.txt	/*:cbo*
 :cbottom	quickfix.txt	/*:cbottom*
 :cbuffer	quickfix.txt	/*:cbuffer*
@@ -2491,12 +2501,16 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :lNf	quickfix.txt	/*:lNf*
 :lNfile	quickfix.txt	/*:lNfile*
 :la	editing.txt	/*:la*
+:lab	quickfix.txt	/*:lab*
+:labove	quickfix.txt	/*:labove*
 :lad	quickfix.txt	/*:lad*
 :laddb	quickfix.txt	/*:laddb*
 :laddbuffer	quickfix.txt	/*:laddbuffer*
 :laddexpr	quickfix.txt	/*:laddexpr*
 :laddf	quickfix.txt	/*:laddf*
 :laddfile	quickfix.txt	/*:laddfile*
+:laf	quickfix.txt	/*:laf*
+:lafter	quickfix.txt	/*:lafter*
 :lan	mlang.txt	/*:lan*
 :lang	mlang.txt	/*:lang*
 :language	mlang.txt	/*:language*
@@ -2504,6 +2518,10 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :lat	undo.txt	/*:lat*
 :later	undo.txt	/*:later*
 :lb	quickfix.txt	/*:lb*
+:lbe	quickfix.txt	/*:lbe*
+:lbefore	quickfix.txt	/*:lbefore*
+:lbel	quickfix.txt	/*:lbel*
+:lbelow	quickfix.txt	/*:lbelow*
 :lbo	quickfix.txt	/*:lbo*
 :lbottom	quickfix.txt	/*:lbottom*
 :lbuffer	quickfix.txt	/*:lbuffer*
@@ -2531,6 +2549,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :let-option	eval.txt	/*:let-option*
 :let-register	eval.txt	/*:let-register*
 :let-unpack	eval.txt	/*:let-unpack*
+:let..=	eval.txt	/*:let..=*
 :let.=	eval.txt	/*:let.=*
 :let/=	eval.txt	/*:let\/=*
 :letstar=	eval.txt	/*:letstar=*
@@ -2936,6 +2955,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :scripte	repeat.txt	/*:scripte*
 :scriptencoding	repeat.txt	/*:scriptencoding*
 :scriptnames	repeat.txt	/*:scriptnames*
+:scriptv	repeat.txt	/*:scriptv*
+:scriptversion	repeat.txt	/*:scriptversion*
 :scs	if_cscop.txt	/*:scs*
 :scscope	if_cscop.txt	/*:scscope*
 :se	options.txt	/*:se*
@@ -3182,6 +3203,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :tag	tagsrch.txt	/*:tag*
 :tags	tagsrch.txt	/*:tags*
 :tc	if_tcl.txt	/*:tc*
+:tcd	editing.txt	/*:tcd*
+:tch	editing.txt	/*:tch*
+:tchdir	editing.txt	/*:tchdir*
 :tcl	if_tcl.txt	/*:tcl*
 :tcld	if_tcl.txt	/*:tcld*
 :tcldo	if_tcl.txt	/*:tcldo*
@@ -3343,6 +3367,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :xnoremap	map.txt	/*:xnoremap*
 :xnoreme	gui.txt	/*:xnoreme*
 :xnoremenu	gui.txt	/*:xnoremenu*
+:xr	various.txt	/*:xr*
+:xrestore	various.txt	/*:xrestore*
 :xu	map.txt	/*:xu*
 :xunmap	map.txt	/*:xunmap*
 :xunme	gui.txt	/*:xunme*
@@ -3417,6 +3443,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 <F9>	term.txt	/*<F9>*
 <Help>	helphelp.txt	/*<Help>*
 <Home>	motion.txt	/*<Home>*
+<Ignore>	eval.txt	/*<Ignore>*
 <Insert>	insert.txt	/*<Insert>*
 <Leader>	map.txt	/*<Leader>*
 <Left>	motion.txt	/*<Left>*
@@ -3645,7 +3672,6 @@ CTRL-V-alternative	gui_w32.txt	/*CTRL-V-alternative*
 CTRL-W	index.txt	/*CTRL-W*
 CTRL-W_+	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_+*
 CTRL-W_-	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_-*
-CTRL-W_.	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_.*
 CTRL-W_:	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_:*
 CTRL-W_<	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_<*
 CTRL-W_<BS>	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_<BS>*
@@ -3685,7 +3711,6 @@ CTRL-W_H	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_H*
 CTRL-W_J	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_J*
 CTRL-W_K	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_K*
 CTRL-W_L	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_L*
-CTRL-W_N	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_N*
 CTRL-W_P	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_P*
 CTRL-W_R	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_R*
 CTRL-W_S	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_S*
@@ -3700,9 +3725,11 @@ CTRL-W_c	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_c*
 CTRL-W_d	tagsrch.txt	/*CTRL-W_d*
 CTRL-W_f	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_f*
 CTRL-W_gF	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_gF*
+CTRL-W_gT	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_gT*
 CTRL-W_g]	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_g]*
 CTRL-W_g_CTRL-]	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_g_CTRL-]*
 CTRL-W_gf	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_gf*
+CTRL-W_gt	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_gt*
 CTRL-W_g}	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_g}*
 CTRL-W_h	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_h*
 CTRL-W_i	tagsrch.txt	/*CTRL-W_i*
@@ -3713,7 +3740,6 @@ CTRL-W_n	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_n*
 CTRL-W_o	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_o*
 CTRL-W_p	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_p*
 CTRL-W_q	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_q*
-CTRL-W_quote	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_quote*
 CTRL-W_r	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_r*
 CTRL-W_s	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_s*
 CTRL-W_t	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_t*
@@ -3746,6 +3772,7 @@ ColorScheme	autocmd.txt	/*ColorScheme*
 ColorSchemePre	autocmd.txt	/*ColorSchemePre*
 Command-line	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line*
 Command-line-mode	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line-mode*
+CompleteChanged	autocmd.txt	/*CompleteChanged*
 CompleteDone	autocmd.txt	/*CompleteDone*
 ConPTY	terminal.txt	/*ConPTY*
 Contents	quickref.txt	/*Contents*
@@ -3915,7 +3942,7 @@ E232	message.txt	/*E232*
 E233	gui.txt	/*E233*
 E234	options.txt	/*E234*
 E235	options.txt	/*E235*
-E236	options.txt	/*E236*
+E236	gui.txt	/*E236*
 E237	print.txt	/*E237*
 E238	print.txt	/*E238*
 E239	sign.txt	/*E239*
@@ -3923,8 +3950,8 @@ E24	message.txt	/*E24*
 E240	remote.txt	/*E240*
 E241	eval.txt	/*E241*
 E243	if_ole.txt	/*E243*
-E244	options.txt	/*E244*
+E244	gui.txt	/*E244*
-E245	options.txt	/*E245*
+E245	gui.txt	/*E245*
 E246	autocmd.txt	/*E246*
 E247	remote.txt	/*E247*
 E248	remote.txt	/*E248*
@@ -4693,7 +4720,14 @@ E98	diff.txt	/*E98*
 E980	eval.txt	/*E980*
 E981	starting.txt	/*E981*
 E982	terminal.txt	/*E982*
+E983	message.txt	/*E983*
+E984	repeat.txt	/*E984*
+E985	eval.txt	/*E985*
+E986	tagsrch.txt	/*E986*
+E987	tagsrch.txt	/*E987*
+E988	gui_w32.txt	/*E988*
 E99	diff.txt	/*E99*
+E999	repeat.txt	/*E999*
 EX	intro.txt	/*EX*
 EXINIT	starting.txt	/*EXINIT*
 Elvis	intro.txt	/*Elvis*
@@ -5243,6 +5277,7 @@ autocmd-groups	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-groups*
 autocmd-intro	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-intro*
 autocmd-list	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-list*
 autocmd-nested	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-nested*
+autocmd-once	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-once*
 autocmd-osfiletypes	filetype.txt	/*autocmd-osfiletypes*
 autocmd-patterns	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-patterns*
 autocmd-remove	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-remove*
@@ -5284,6 +5319,7 @@ backup-changed	version4.txt	/*backup-changed*
 backup-extension	version4.txt	/*backup-extension*
 backup-table	editing.txt	/*backup-table*
 balloon-eval	debugger.txt	/*balloon-eval*
+balloon_gettext()	eval.txt	/*balloon_gettext()*
 balloon_show()	eval.txt	/*balloon_show()*
 balloon_split()	eval.txt	/*balloon_split()*
 bar	motion.txt	/*bar*
@@ -5558,6 +5594,7 @@ charconvert_to-variable	eval.txt	/*charconvert_to-variable*
 charity	uganda.txt	/*charity*
 charset	mbyte.txt	/*charset*
 charset-conversion	mbyte.txt	/*charset-conversion*
+chdir()	eval.txt	/*chdir()*
 chill.vim	syntax.txt	/*chill.vim*
 chmod	eval.txt	/*chmod*
 cindent()	eval.txt	/*cindent()*
@@ -5678,6 +5715,8 @@ complete_CTRL-E	insert.txt	/*complete_CTRL-E*
 complete_CTRL-Y	insert.txt	/*complete_CTRL-Y*
 complete_add()	eval.txt	/*complete_add()*
 complete_check()	eval.txt	/*complete_check()*
+complete_info()	eval.txt	/*complete_info()*
+complete_info_mode	eval.txt	/*complete_info_mode*
 completed_item-variable	eval.txt	/*completed_item-variable*
 completion-functions	usr_41.txt	/*completion-functions*
 complex-change	change.txt	/*complex-change*
@@ -5983,6 +6022,7 @@ encryption	editing.txt	/*encryption*
 end	intro.txt	/*end*
 end-of-file	pattern.txt	/*end-of-file*
 enlightened-terminal	syntax.txt	/*enlightened-terminal*
+environ()	eval.txt	/*environ()*
 erlang.vim	syntax.txt	/*erlang.vim*
 err_buf	channel.txt	/*err_buf*
 err_cb	channel.txt	/*err_cb*
@@ -6070,6 +6110,7 @@ expr-'	eval.txt	/*expr-'*
 expr-+	eval.txt	/*expr-+*
 expr--	eval.txt	/*expr--*
 expr-.	eval.txt	/*expr-.*
+expr-..	eval.txt	/*expr-..*
 expr-/	eval.txt	/*expr-\/*
 expr-<	eval.txt	/*expr-<*
 expr-<#	eval.txt	/*expr-<#*
@@ -6721,6 +6762,7 @@ getcmdwintype()	eval.txt	/*getcmdwintype()*
 getcompletion()	eval.txt	/*getcompletion()*
 getcurpos()	eval.txt	/*getcurpos()*
 getcwd()	eval.txt	/*getcwd()*
+getenv()	eval.txt	/*getenv()*
 getfontname()	eval.txt	/*getfontname()*
 getfperm()	eval.txt	/*getfperm()*
 getfsize()	eval.txt	/*getfsize()*
@@ -6813,6 +6855,8 @@ gui-IME	gui.txt	/*gui-IME*
 gui-clipboard	gui_w32.txt	/*gui-clipboard*
 gui-colors	syntax.txt	/*gui-colors*
 gui-extras	gui.txt	/*gui-extras*
+gui-font	gui.txt	/*gui-font*
+gui-fontwide	gui.txt	/*gui-fontwide*
 gui-footer	debugger.txt	/*gui-footer*
 gui-fork	gui_x11.txt	/*gui-fork*
 gui-functions	usr_41.txt	/*gui-functions*
@@ -6864,8 +6908,8 @@ gui-x11-various	gui_x11.txt	/*gui-x11-various*
 gui.txt	gui.txt	/*gui.txt*
 gui_w32.txt	gui_w32.txt	/*gui_w32.txt*
 gui_x11.txt	gui_x11.txt	/*gui_x11.txt*
-guifontwide_gtk	options.txt	/*guifontwide_gtk*
+guifontwide_gtk	gui.txt	/*guifontwide_gtk*
-guifontwide_win_mbyte	options.txt	/*guifontwide_win_mbyte*
+guifontwide_win_mbyte	gui.txt	/*guifontwide_win_mbyte*
 guu	change.txt	/*guu*
 gv	visual.txt	/*gv*
 gview	starting.txt	/*gview*
@@ -7239,6 +7283,7 @@ ip	motion.txt	/*ip*
 iquote	motion.txt	/*iquote*
 is	motion.txt	/*is*
 isdirectory()	eval.txt	/*isdirectory()*
+isinf()	eval.txt	/*isinf()*
 islocked()	eval.txt	/*islocked()*
 isnan()	eval.txt	/*isnan()*
 it	motion.txt	/*it*
@@ -7366,6 +7411,7 @@ list-identity	eval.txt	/*list-identity*
 list-index	eval.txt	/*list-index*
 list-modification	eval.txt	/*list-modification*
 list-repeat	windows.txt	/*list-repeat*
+list2str()	eval.txt	/*list2str()*
 lite.vim	syntax.txt	/*lite.vim*
 literal-string	eval.txt	/*literal-string*
 lnum-variable	eval.txt	/*lnum-variable*
@@ -7402,6 +7448,7 @@ love	intro.txt	/*love*
 lowercase	change.txt	/*lowercase*
 lpc.vim	syntax.txt	/*lpc.vim*
 lua	if_lua.txt	/*lua*
+lua-blob	if_lua.txt	/*lua-blob*
 lua-buffer	if_lua.txt	/*lua-buffer*
 lua-commands	if_lua.txt	/*lua-commands*
 lua-dict	if_lua.txt	/*lua-dict*
@@ -8251,6 +8298,7 @@ quake.vim	syntax.txt	/*quake.vim*
 quickfix	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix*
 quickfix-6	version6.txt	/*quickfix-6*
 quickfix-ID	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-ID*
+quickfix-buffer	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-buffer*
 quickfix-changedtick	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-changedtick*
 quickfix-context	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-context*
 quickfix-directory-stack	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-directory-stack*
@@ -8313,6 +8361,7 @@ read-in-close-cb	channel.txt	/*read-in-close-cb*
 read-messages	insert.txt	/*read-messages*
 read-only-share	editing.txt	/*read-only-share*
 read-stdin	version5.txt	/*read-stdin*
+readdir()	eval.txt	/*readdir()*
 readfile()	eval.txt	/*readfile()*
 readline.vim	syntax.txt	/*readline.vim*
 recording	repeat.txt	/*recording*
@@ -8385,6 +8434,7 @@ ruby-dynamic	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-dynamic*
 ruby-evaluate	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-evaluate*
 ruby-globals	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-globals*
 ruby-message	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-message*
+ruby-rubyeval	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-rubyeval*
 ruby-set_option	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-set_option*
 ruby-vim	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-vim*
 ruby-window	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-window*
@@ -8396,6 +8446,7 @@ ruby_no_expensive	syntax.txt	/*ruby_no_expensive*
 ruby_operators	syntax.txt	/*ruby_operators*
 ruby_space_errors	syntax.txt	/*ruby_space_errors*
 ruby_spellcheck_strings	syntax.txt	/*ruby_spellcheck_strings*
+rubyeval()	eval.txt	/*rubyeval()*
 russian	russian.txt	/*russian*
 russian-intro	russian.txt	/*russian-intro*
 russian-issues	russian.txt	/*russian-issues*
@@ -8444,14 +8495,17 @@ scheme.vim	syntax.txt	/*scheme.vim*
 scp	pi_netrw.txt	/*scp*
 screenattr()	eval.txt	/*screenattr()*
 screenchar()	eval.txt	/*screenchar()*
+screenchars()	eval.txt	/*screenchars()*
 screencol()	eval.txt	/*screencol()*
 screenrow()	eval.txt	/*screenrow()*
+screenstring()	eval.txt	/*screenstring()*
 script	usr_41.txt	/*script*
 script-here	if_perl.txt	/*script-here*
 script-local	map.txt	/*script-local*
 script-variable	eval.txt	/*script-variable*
 scriptnames-dictionary	eval.txt	/*scriptnames-dictionary*
 scriptout-changed	version4.txt	/*scriptout-changed*
+scriptversion	eval.txt	/*scriptversion*
 scroll-binding	scroll.txt	/*scroll-binding*
 scroll-cursor	scroll.txt	/*scroll-cursor*
 scroll-down	scroll.txt	/*scroll-down*
@@ -8497,6 +8551,7 @@ setbufline()	eval.txt	/*setbufline()*
 setbufvar()	eval.txt	/*setbufvar()*
 setcharsearch()	eval.txt	/*setcharsearch()*
 setcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*setcmdpos()*
+setenv()	eval.txt	/*setenv()*
 setfperm()	eval.txt	/*setfperm()*
 setline()	eval.txt	/*setline()*
 setloclist()	eval.txt	/*setloclist()*
@@ -8727,6 +8782,7 @@ static-tag	tagsrch.txt	/*static-tag*
 status-line	windows.txt	/*status-line*
 statusmsg-variable	eval.txt	/*statusmsg-variable*
 str2float()	eval.txt	/*str2float()*
+str2list()	eval.txt	/*str2list()*
 str2nr()	eval.txt	/*str2nr()*
 strcasestr()	eval.txt	/*strcasestr()*
 strcharpart()	eval.txt	/*strcharpart()*
@@ -8826,7 +8882,14 @@ t_AL	term.txt	/*t_AL*
 t_BD	term.txt	/*t_BD*
 t_BE	term.txt	/*t_BE*
 t_CS	term.txt	/*t_CS*
+t_CTRL-W_.	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_.*
+t_CTRL-W_:	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_:*
 t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C*
+t_CTRL-W_CTRL-W	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_CTRL-W*
+t_CTRL-W_N	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_N*
+t_CTRL-W_gT	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_gT*
+t_CTRL-W_gt	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_gt*
+t_CTRL-W_quote	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_quote*
 t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-\\_CTRL-N*
 t_CV	term.txt	/*t_CV*
 t_Ce	term.txt	/*t_Ce*
@@ -9016,11 +9079,11 @@ tabpagenr()	eval.txt	/*tabpagenr()*
 tabpagewinnr()	eval.txt	/*tabpagewinnr()*
 tag	tagsrch.txt	/*tag*
 tag-!	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-!*
-tag-any-white	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-any-white*
 tag-binary-search	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-binary-search*
 tag-blocks	motion.txt	/*tag-blocks*
 tag-commands	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-commands*
 tag-details	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-details*
+tag-function	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-function*
 tag-functions	usr_41.txt	/*tag-functions*
 tag-highlight	syntax.txt	/*tag-highlight*
 tag-matchlist	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-matchlist*
@@ -9196,7 +9259,9 @@ test_null_partial()	eval.txt	/*test_null_partial()*
 test_null_string()	eval.txt	/*test_null_string()*
 test_option_not_set()	eval.txt	/*test_option_not_set()*
 test_override()	eval.txt	/*test_override()*
+test_refcount()	eval.txt	/*test_refcount()*
 test_scrollbar()	eval.txt	/*test_scrollbar()*
+test_setmouse()	eval.txt	/*test_setmouse()*
 test_settime()	eval.txt	/*test_settime()*
 testing	eval.txt	/*testing*
 testing-variable	eval.txt	/*testing-variable*
@@ -9225,6 +9290,7 @@ text-prop-functions	textprop.txt	/*text-prop-functions*
 text-prop-intro	textprop.txt	/*text-prop-intro*
 text-properties	textprop.txt	/*text-properties*
 textlock	eval.txt	/*textlock*
+textprop	textprop.txt	/*textprop*
 textprop.txt	textprop.txt	/*textprop.txt*
 tf.vim	syntax.txt	/*tf.vim*
 this_session-variable	eval.txt	/*this_session-variable*
@@ -9595,6 +9661,7 @@ version8.1	version8.txt	/*version8.1*
 version8.txt	version8.txt	/*version8.txt*
 vi	intro.txt	/*vi*
 vi-differences	vi_diff.txt	/*vi-differences*
+vi-features	vi_diff.txt	/*vi-features*
 vi:	options.txt	/*vi:*
 vi_diff.txt	vi_diff.txt	/*vi_diff.txt*
 vib	motion.txt	/*vib*
@@ -9665,6 +9732,8 @@ vimrc-filetype	usr_05.txt	/*vimrc-filetype*
 vimrc-intro	usr_05.txt	/*vimrc-intro*
 vimrc-option-example	starting.txt	/*vimrc-option-example*
 vimrc_example.vim	usr_05.txt	/*vimrc_example.vim*
+vimscript-version	eval.txt	/*vimscript-version*
+vimscript-versions	eval.txt	/*vimscript-versions*
 vimtutor	usr_01.txt	/*vimtutor*
 virtcol()	eval.txt	/*virtcol()*
 visual-block	visual.txt	/*visual-block*

runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 13
+*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ See section |29.1| of the user manual for an introduction.
 4. Tags details			|tag-details|
 5. Tags file format		|tags-file-format|
 6. Include file searches	|include-search|
+7. Using 'tagfunc'		|tag-function|
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Jump to a tag					*tag-commands*
@@ -55,11 +56,10 @@ CTRL-]			Jump to the definition of the keyword under the
 			to the [count] one.  When no [count] is given the
 			first one is jumped to. See |tag-matchlist| for
 			jumping to other matching tags.
-			{Vi: identifier after the cursor}
 
 							*v_CTRL-]*
 {Visual}CTRL-]		Same as ":tag {name}", where {name} is the text that
-			is highlighted.  {not in Vi}
+			is highlighted.
 
 							*telnet-CTRL-]*
 CTRL-] is the default telnet escape key.  When you type CTRL-] to jump to a
@@ -111,18 +111,18 @@ Tags are only pushed onto the stack when the 'tagstack' option is set.
 g<RightMouse>						*g<RightMouse>*
 <C-RightMouse>					*<C-RightMouse>* *CTRL-T*
 CTRL-T			Jump to [count] older entry in the tag stack
-			(default 1).  {not in Vi}
+			(default 1).
 
 						*:po* *:pop* *E555* *E556*
 :[count]po[p][!]	Jump to [count] older entry in tag stack (default 1).
-			See |tag-!| for [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |tag-!| for [!].
 
 :[count]ta[g][!]	Jump to [count] newer entry in tag stack (default 1).
-			See |tag-!| for [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |tag-!| for [!].
 
 							*:tags*
 :tags			Show the contents of the tag stack.  The active
-			entry is marked with a '>'.  {not in Vi}
+			entry is marked with a '>'.
 
 The output of ":tags" looks like this:
 
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ the same entry.
 			the current position in the list (if there is one).
 			[name] can be a regexp pattern, see |tag-regexp|.
 			See |tag-priority| for the priorities used in the
-			listing.  {not in Vi}
+			listing.
 			Example output:
 
 >
@@ -230,54 +230,50 @@ the same entry.
 
 							*:sts* *:stselect*
 :sts[elect][!] [name]	Does ":tselect[!] [name]" and splits the window for
-			the selected tag.  {not in Vi}
+			the selected tag.
 
 							*g]*
 g]			Like CTRL-], but use ":tselect" instead of ":tag".
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*v_g]*
 {Visual}g]		Same as "g]", but use the highlighted text as the
-			identifier.  {not in Vi}
+			identifier.
 
 							*:tj* *:tjump*
 :tj[ump][!] [name]	Like ":tselect", but jump to the tag directly when
-			there is only one match.  {not in Vi}
+			there is only one match.
 
 							*:stj* *:stjump*
 :stj[ump][!] [name]	Does ":tjump[!] [name]" and splits the window for the
-			selected tag.  {not in Vi}
+			selected tag.
 
 							*g_CTRL-]*
 g CTRL-]		Like CTRL-], but use ":tjump" instead of ":tag".
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*v_g_CTRL-]*
 {Visual}g CTRL-]	Same as "g CTRL-]", but use the highlighted text as
-			the identifier.  {not in Vi}
+			the identifier.
 
 							*:tn* *:tnext*
 :[count]tn[ext][!]	Jump to [count] next matching tag (default 1).  See
-			|tag-!| for [!].  {not in Vi}
+			|tag-!| for [!].
 
 							*:tp* *:tprevious*
 :[count]tp[revious][!]	Jump to [count] previous matching tag (default 1).
-			See |tag-!| for [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |tag-!| for [!].
 
 							*:tN* *:tNext*
-:[count]tN[ext][!]	Same as ":tprevious".  {not in Vi}
+:[count]tN[ext][!]	Same as ":tprevious".
 
 							*:tr* *:trewind*
 :[count]tr[ewind][!]	Jump to first matching tag.  If [count] is given, jump
-			to [count]th matching tag.  See |tag-!| for [!].  {not
+			to [count]th matching tag.  See |tag-!| for [!].
-			in Vi}
 
 							*:tf* *:tfirst*
-:[count]tf[irst][!]	Same as ":trewind".  {not in Vi}
+:[count]tf[irst][!]	Same as ":trewind".
 
 							*:tl* *:tlast*
-:tl[ast][!]		Jump to last matching tag.  See |tag-!| for [!].  {not
+:tl[ast][!]		Jump to last matching tag.  See |tag-!| for [!].
-			in Vi}
 
 							*:lt* *:ltag*
 :lt[ag][!] [name]	Jump to tag [name] and add the matching tags to a new
@@ -289,7 +285,6 @@ g CTRL-]		Like CTRL-], but use ":tjump" instead of ":tag".
 			characters (very nomagic). The location list showing
 			the matching tags is independent of the tag stack.
 			See |tag-!| for [!].
-			{not in Vi}
 
 When there is no other message, Vim shows which matching tag has been jumped
 to, and the number of matching tags: >
@@ -316,34 +311,28 @@ the same as above, with a "p" prepended.
 							*:pts* *:ptselect*
 :pts[elect][!] [name]	Does ":tselect[!] [name]" and shows the new tag in a
 			"Preview" window.  See |:ptag| for more info.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ptj* *:ptjump*
 :ptj[ump][!] [name]	Does ":tjump[!] [name]" and shows the new tag in a
 			"Preview" window.  See |:ptag| for more info.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ptn* *:ptnext*
 :[count]ptn[ext][!]	":tnext" in the preview window.  See |:ptag|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ptp* *:ptprevious*
 :[count]ptp[revious][!]	":tprevious" in the preview window.  See |:ptag|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ptN* *:ptNext*
-:[count]ptN[ext][!]	Same as ":ptprevious".  {not in Vi}
+:[count]ptN[ext][!]	Same as ":ptprevious".
 
 							*:ptr* *:ptrewind*
 :[count]ptr[ewind][!]	":trewind" in the preview window.  See |:ptag|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ptf* *:ptfirst*
-:[count]ptf[irst][!]	Same as ":ptrewind".  {not in Vi}
+:[count]ptf[irst][!]	Same as ":ptrewind".
 
 							*:ptl* *:ptlast*
 :ptl[ast][!]		":tlast" in the preview window.  See |:ptag|.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. Tags details						*tag-details*
@@ -431,7 +420,6 @@ In a future version changing the buffer will be impossible.  All this for
 security reasons: Somebody might hide a nasty command in the tags file, which
 would otherwise go unnoticed.  Example: >
 	:$d|/tag-function-name/
-{this security prevention is not present in Vi}
 
 In Vi the ":tag" command sets the last search pattern when the tag is searched
 for.  In Vim this is not done, the previous search pattern is still remembered,
@@ -529,28 +517,21 @@ gnatxref		For Ada.  See http://www.gnuada.org/.  gnatxref is
 			part of the gnat package.
 
 
-The lines in the tags file must have one of these three formats:
+The lines in the tags file must have one of these two formats:
 
 1.  {tagname}		{TAB} {tagfile} {TAB} {tagaddress}
-2.  {tagfile}:{tagname} {TAB} {tagfile} {TAB} {tagaddress}
+2.  {tagname}		{TAB} {tagfile} {TAB} {tagaddress} {term} {field} ..
-3.  {tagname}		{TAB} {tagfile} {TAB} {tagaddress} {term} {field} ..
 
-The first is a normal tag, which is completely compatible with Vi.  It is the
+Previously an old format was supported, see |tag-old-static|.
-only format produced by traditional ctags implementations.  This is often used
+
-for functions that are global, also referenced in other files.
+The first format is a normal tag, which is completely compatible with Vi.  It
+is the only format produced by traditional ctags implementations.  This is
+often used for functions that are global, also referenced in other files.
 
 The lines in the tags file can end in <LF> or <CR><LF>.  On the Macintosh <CR>
 also works.  The <CR> and <NL> characters can never appear inside a line.
 
-							*tag-old-static*
+The second format is new.  It includes additional information in optional
-The second format is for a static tag only.  It is obsolete now, replaced by
-the third format.  It is only supported by Elvis 1.x and Vim and a few
-versions of ctags.  A static tag is often used for functions that are local,
-only referenced in the file {tagfile}.  Note that for the static tag, the two
-occurrences of {tagfile} must be exactly the same.  Also see |tags-option|
-below, for how static tags are used.
-
-The third format is new.  It includes additional information in optional
 fields at the end of each line.  It is backwards compatible with Vi.  It is
 only supported by new versions of ctags (such as Exuberant ctags).
 
@@ -558,8 +539,7 @@ only supported by new versions of ctags (such as Exuberant ctags).
 		be any identifier.  It cannot contain a <Tab>.
 {TAB}		One <Tab> character.  Note: previous versions allowed any
 		white space here.  This has been abandoned to allow spaces in
-		{tagfile}.  It can be re-enabled by including the
+		{tagfile}.
-		|+tag_any_white| feature at compile time. *tag-any-white*
 {tagfile}	The file that contains the definition of {tagname}.  It can
 		have an absolute or relative path.  It may contain environment
 		variables and wildcards (although the use of wildcards is
@@ -578,7 +558,7 @@ only supported by new versions of ctags (such as Exuberant ctags).
 		the bar) and ;" is used to have Vi ignore the rest of the
 		line.  Example:
 			APP	file.c	call cursor(3, 4)|;"	v
-			
+
 {field} ..	A list of optional fields.  Each field has the form:
 
 			<Tab>{fieldname}:{value}
@@ -599,6 +579,7 @@ only supported by new versions of ctags (such as Exuberant ctags).
 		The only other field currently recognized by Vim is "file:"
 		(with an empty value).  It is used for a static tag.
 
+
 The first lines in the tags file can contain lines that start with
 	!_TAG_
 These are sorted to the first lines, only rare tags that start with "!" can
@@ -636,10 +617,7 @@ If the command is a normal search command (it starts and ends with "/" or
 "?"), some special handling is done:
 - Searching starts on line 1 of the file.
   The direction of the search is forward for "/", backward for "?".
-  Note that 'wrapscan' does not matter, the whole file is always searched.  (Vi
+  Note that 'wrapscan' does not matter, the whole file is always searched.
-  does use 'wrapscan', which caused tags sometimes not be found.)  {Vi starts
-  searching in line 2 of another file.  It does not find a tag in line 1 of
-  another file when 'wrapscan' is not set}
 - If the search fails, another try is done ignoring case.  If that fails too,
   a search is done for:
 	"^tagname[ \t]*("
@@ -650,7 +628,22 @@ If the command is a normal search command (it starts and ends with "/" or
 	"^[#a-zA-Z_].*\<tagname[ \t]*("
   This means: A line starting with '#' or an identifier and containing the tag
   followed by white space and a '('.  This will find macro names and function
-  names with a type prepended.  {the extra searches are not in Vi}
+  names with a type prepended.
+
+
+							*tag-old-static*
+Until March 2019 (patch 8.1.1092) an outdated format was supported:
+    {tagfile}:{tagname} {TAB} {tagfile} {TAB} {tagaddress}
+
+This format is for a static tag only.  It is obsolete now, replaced by
+the second format.  It is only supported by Elvis 1.x, older Vim versions and
+a few versions of ctags.  A static tag is often used for functions that are
+local, only referenced in the file {tagfile}.  Note that for the static tag,
+the two occurrences of {tagfile} must be exactly the same.  Also see
+|tags-option| below, for how static tags are used.
+
+The support was removed, since when you can update to the new Vim version you
+should also be able to update ctags to one that supports the second format.
 
 ==============================================================================
 6. Include file searches		*include-search* *definition-search*
@@ -711,33 +704,31 @@ mapping to do that for you.  Here is an example: >
 			of the file.  Lines that look like a comment are
 			ignored (see 'comments' option).  If a count is given,
 			the count'th matching line is displayed, and comment
-			lines are not ignored.  {not in Vi}
+			lines are not ignored.
 
 							*]i*
 ]i			like "[i", but start at the current cursor position.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:is* *:isearch*
 :[range]is[earch][!] [count] [/]pattern[/]
 			Like "[i"  and "]i", but search in [range] lines
 			(default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 
 							*[I*
 [I			Display all lines that contain the keyword under the
 			cursor.  Filenames and line numbers are displayed
 			for the found lines.  The search starts at the
-			beginning of the file.  {not in Vi}
+			beginning of the file.
 
 							*]I*
 ]I			like "[I", but start at the current cursor position.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:il* *:ilist*
 :[range]il[ist][!] [/]pattern[/]
 			Like "[I" and "]I", but search in [range] lines
 			(default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 
 							*[_CTRL-I*
 [ CTRL-I		Jump to the first line that contains the keyword
@@ -745,17 +736,17 @@ mapping to do that for you.  Here is an example: >
 			of the file.  Lines that look like a comment are
 			ignored (see 'comments' option).  If a count is given,
 			the count'th matching line is jumped to, and comment
-			lines are not ignored.  {not in Vi}
+			lines are not ignored.
 
 							*]_CTRL-I*
 ] CTRL-I		like "[ CTRL-I", but start at the current cursor
-			position.  {not in Vi}
+			position.
 
 							*:ij* *:ijump*
 :[range]ij[ump][!] [count] [/]pattern[/]
 			Like "[ CTRL-I"  and "] CTRL-I", but search in
 			[range] lines (default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 
 CTRL-W CTRL-I					*CTRL-W_CTRL-I* *CTRL-W_i*
 CTRL-W i		Open a new window, with the cursor on the first line
@@ -764,45 +755,43 @@ CTRL-W i		Open a new window, with the cursor on the first line
 			that look like a comment line are ignored (see
 			'comments' option).  If a count is given, the count'th
 			matching line is jumped to, and comment lines are not
-			ignored.  {not in Vi}
+			ignored.
 
 							*:isp* *:isplit*
 :[range]isp[lit][!] [count] [/]pattern[/]
 			Like "CTRL-W i"  and "CTRL-W i", but search in
 			[range] lines (default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 
 							*[d*
 [d			Display the first macro definition that contains the
 			macro under the cursor.  The search starts from the
 			beginning of the file.  If a count is given, the
-			count'th matching line is displayed.  {not in Vi}
+			count'th matching line is displayed.
 
 							*]d*
 ]d			like "[d", but start at the current cursor position.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:ds* *:dsearch*
 :[range]ds[earch][!] [count] [/]string[/]
 			Like "[d"  and "]d", but search in [range] lines
 			(default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 
 							*[D*
 [D			Display all macro definitions that contain the macro
 			under the cursor.  Filenames and line numbers are
 			displayed for the found lines.  The search starts
-			from the beginning of the file.  {not in Vi}
+			from the beginning of the file.
 
 							*]D*
 ]D			like "[D", but start at the current cursor position.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:dli* *:dlist*
 :[range]dli[st][!] [/]string[/]
 			Like `[D`  and `]D`, but search in [range] lines
 			(default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 			Note that `:dl` works like `:delete` with the "l"
 			flag, not `:dlist`.
 
@@ -810,36 +799,35 @@ CTRL-W i		Open a new window, with the cursor on the first line
 [ CTRL-D		Jump to the first macro definition that contains the
 			keyword under the cursor.  The search starts from
 			the beginning of the file.  If a count is given, the
-			count'th matching line is jumped to.  {not in Vi}
+			count'th matching line is jumped to.
 
 							*]_CTRL-D*
 ] CTRL-D		like "[ CTRL-D", but start at the current cursor
-			position.  {not in Vi}
+			position.
 
 							*:dj* *:djump*
 :[range]dj[ump][!] [count] [/]string[/]
 			Like "[ CTRL-D"  and "] CTRL-D", but search  in
 			[range] lines (default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 
 CTRL-W CTRL-D					*CTRL-W_CTRL-D* *CTRL-W_d*
 CTRL-W d		Open a new window, with the cursor on the first
 			macro definition line that contains the keyword
 			under the cursor.  The search starts from the
 			beginning of the file.  If a count is given, the
-			count'th matching line is jumped to.  {not in Vi}
+			count'th matching line is jumped to.
 
 							*:dsp* *:dsplit*
 :[range]dsp[lit][!] [count] [/]string[/]
 			Like "CTRL-W d", but search in [range] lines
 			(default: whole file).
-			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
+			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].
 
 							*:che* *:checkpath*
 :che[ckpath]		List all the included files that could not be found.
-			{not in Vi}
 
-:che[ckpath]!		List all the included files.  {not in Vi}
+:che[ckpath]!		List all the included files.
 
 								*:search-args*
 Common arguments for the commands above:
@@ -863,4 +851,70 @@ Common arguments for the commands above:
 <	For a ":djump", ":dsplit", ":dlist" and ":dsearch" command the pattern
 	is used as a literal string, not as a search pattern.
 
+==============================================================================
+7. Using 'tagfunc'						*tag-function*
+
+It is possible to provide Vim with a function which will generate a list of
+tags used for commands like |:tag|, |:tselect| and Normal mode tag commands
+like |CTRL-]|.
+
+The function used for generating the taglist is specified by setting the
+'tagfunc' option.  The function will be called with three arguments:
+   a:pattern	The tag identifier used during the tag search.
+   a:flags	List of flags to control the function behavior.
+   a:info	Dict containing the following entries:
+		    buf_ffname	  Full filename which can be used for priority.
+		    user_data	  Custom data String, if stored in the tag
+				  stack previously by tagfunc.
+
+Currently two flags may be passed to the tag function:
+  'c'		The function was invoked by a normal command being processed
+	        (mnemonic: the tag function may use the context around the
+		cursor to perform a better job of generating the tag list.)
+  'i'		In Insert mode, the user was completing a tag (with
+		|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]|).
+
+Note that when 'tagfunc' is set, the priority of the tags described in
+|tag-priority| does not apply.  Instead, the priority is exactly as the
+ordering of the elements in the list returned by the function.
+								*E987*
+The function should return a List of Dict entries.  Each Dict must at least
+include the following entries and each value must be a string:
+	name		Name of the tag.
+	filename	Name of the file where the tag is defined.  It is
+			either relative to the current directory or a full path.
+	cmd		Ex command used to locate the tag in the file.  This
+			can be either an Ex search pattern or a line number.
+Note that the format is similar to that of |taglist()|, which makes it possible
+to use its output to generate the result.
+The following fields are optional:
+	kind		Type of the tag.
+	user_data	String of custom data stored in the tag stack which
+			can be used to disambiguate tags between operations.
+
+If the function returns |v:null| instead of a List, a standard tag lookup will
+be performed instead.
+
+It is not allowed to change the tagstack from inside 'tagfunc'.  *E986* 
+
+The following is a hypothetical example of a function used for 'tagfunc'.  It
+uses the output of |taglist()| to generate the result: a list of tags in the
+inverse order of file names.
+>
+	function! TagFunc(pattern, flags, info)
+	  function! CompareFilenames(item1, item2)
+	    let f1 = a:item1['filename']
+	    let f2 = a:item2['filename']
+	    return f1 >=# f2 ?
+			\ -1 : f1 <=# f2 ? 1 : 0
+	  endfunction
+
+	  let result = taglist(a:pattern)
+	  call sort(result, "CompareFilenames")
+
+	  return result
+	endfunc
+	set tagfunc=TagFunc
+<
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 19
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -249,9 +249,6 @@ It is always possible to change individual strings by setting the
 appropriate option.  For example: >
 	:set t_ce=^V^[[K	(CTRL-V, <Esc>, [, K)
 
-{Vi: no terminal options.  You have to exit Vi, edit the termcap entry and
-try again}
-
 The options are listed below.  The associated termcap code is always equal to
 the last two characters of the option name.  Only one termcap code is
 required: Cursor motion, 't_cm'.
@@ -539,7 +536,7 @@ there should be a tick at allow-window-ops.
 Note about colors: The 't_Co' option tells Vim the number of colors available.
 When it is non-zero, the 't_AB' and 't_AF' options are used to set the color.
 If one of these is not available, 't_Sb' and 't_Sf' are used.  't_me' is used
-to reset to the default colors.
+to reset to the default colors.  Also see 'termguicolors'.
 
 				*termcap-cursor-shape* *termcap-cursor-color*
 When Vim enters Insert mode the 't_SI' escape sequence is sent.  When Vim

runtime/doc/terminal.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*terminal.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 22
+*terminal.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ If the result is "1" you have it.
       Communication			|termdebug-communication|
       Customizing			|termdebug-customizing|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 {only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
 The terminal feature requires the |+job| and |+channel| features.
 
@@ -66,22 +65,23 @@ When the keyboard focus is in the terminal window, typed keys will be sent to
 the job.  This uses a pty when possible.  You can click outside of the
 terminal window to move keyboard focus elsewhere.
 
+						*t_CTRL-W_CTRL-W* *t_CTRL-W_:*
 CTRL-W can be used to navigate between windows and other CTRL-W commands, e.g.:
 	CTRL-W CTRL-W	move focus to the next window
 	CTRL-W :	enter an Ex command
 See |CTRL-W| for more commands.
 
-Special in the terminal window:			*CTRL-W_.*  *CTRL-W_N* 
+Special in the terminal window:			*t_CTRL-W_.*  *t_CTRL-W_N* 
 	CTRL-W .	send a CTRL-W to the job in the terminal
 	CTRL-W CTRL-\	send a CTRL-\ to the job in the terminal
 	CTRL-W N	go to Terminal-Normal mode, see |Terminal-mode|
 	CTRL-\ CTRL-N   go to Terminal-Normal mode, see |Terminal-mode|
-	CTRL-W " {reg}  paste register {reg}		*CTRL-W_quote*
+	CTRL-W " {reg}  paste register {reg}		*t_CTRL-W_quote*
 			Also works with the = register to insert the result of
 			evaluating an expression.
 	CTRL-W CTRL-C	ends the job, see below |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C|
-	CTRL-W gt	go to next tabpage, same as `gt`
+	CTRL-W gt	go to next tabpage, same as `gt`	*t_CTRL-W_gt*
-	CTRL-W gT	go to previous tabpage, same as `gT`
+	CTRL-W gT	go to previous tabpage, same as `gT`	*t_CTRL-W_gT*
 
 See option 'termwinkey' for specifying another key instead of CTRL-W that
 will work like CTRL-W.  However, typing 'termwinkey' twice sends 'termwinkey'
@@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ to the job.  For example:
 	'termwinkey' .	       send 'termwinkey' to the job in the terminal
 	'termwinkey' CTRL-\    send a CTRL-\ to the job in the terminal
 	'termwinkey' N	       go to terminal Normal mode, see below
-	'termwinkey' CTRL-N    same as CTRL-W N
+	'termwinkey' CTRL-N    same as CTRL-W N |t_CTRL-W_N|
-	'termwinkey' CTRL-C    same as |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C|
+	'termwinkey' CTRL-C    same as CTRL-W CTRL-C |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C|
 							*t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N*
 The special key combination CTRL-\ CTRL-N can be used to switch to Normal
 mode, just like this works in any other mode.

runtime/doc/textprop.txt

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-*textprop.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 08
+*textprop.txt*  For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
 
 
-Displaying text with properties attached.		*text-properties*
+Displaying text with properties attached.	*textprop* *text-properties*
 
 THIS IS UNDER DEVELOPMENT - ANYTHING MAY STILL CHANGE  *E967*
 
@@ -20,7 +20,6 @@ What is not working yet:
 3. When text changes		|text-prop-changes|
 
 
-{Vi does not have text properties}
 {not able to use text properties when the |+textprop| feature was
 disabled at compile time}
 
@@ -57,6 +56,10 @@ Property Types ~
 A text property normally has the name of a property type, which defines 
 how to highlight the text.  The property type can have these entries:
 	"highlight"	name of the highlight group to use
+	"combine"	when TRUE the text property highlighting is combined
+			with any syntax highligting, when omitted or FALSE the
+			text property highlighting replaces the syntax
+			highlighting
 	"priority"	when properties overlap, the one with the highest
 			priority will be used.
 	"start_incl"	when TRUE inserts at the start position will be
@@ -129,10 +132,10 @@ When using replace mode, the text properties stay on the same character
 positions, even though the characters themselves change.
 
 
-When text property columns are not updated ~
+Text property columns are not updated: ~
 
 - When setting the line with |setline()| or through an interface, such as Lua,
-  Tcl or Python.
+  Tcl or Python.  Vim does not know what text got inserted or deleted.
 
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 22
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -38,15 +38,6 @@ browser use: https://github.com/vim/vim/issues/1234
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
-Check https://github.com/macvim-dev/macvim/issues/861. 
->
-Patch to add farsi handling to arabic.c (Ali Gholami Rudi, 2009 May 2)
-Added test, updates, June 23.
-Updated for 7.4: http://litcave.rudi.ir/farsi_vim.diff
-Remark from Ameretat Reith (2014 Oct 13) with patch on top.
-
-Timer test doesn't work on MS-Windows console, any way to make it work?
-
 'incsearch' with :s: (#3321)
 - Get E20 when using command history to get "'<,'>s/a/b" and no Visual area
   was set. (#3837)
@@ -113,9 +104,18 @@ Terminal emulator window:
 - When 'encoding' is not utf-8, or the job is using another encoding, setup
   conversions.
 
-Problem with Visual yank when 'linebreak' and 'showbreak' are set.
+Support for popup widows:
-Patch with tests, but it's not clear how it is supposed to work. (tommm, 2018
+- Use text properties to define highlighting.
-Nov 17)  Asked about this, Dec 22. Christian will have a look.
+- Proposal on issue #4063
+
+Notifications for text changes, could be used for LSP.
+- New event, similar to TextChanged, but guaranteed to provide sequential
+  information of all text changes.
+  Possibly build on undo info (but undo itself is also a change).
+  How to deal with ":%s/this/that" ?
+
+Adding "10" to 'spellsuggest' causes spell suggestions to become very slow.
+(#4087)
 
 Does not build with MinGW out of the box:
 - _stat64 is not defined, need to use "struct stat" in vim.h
@@ -131,10 +131,6 @@ Improve fallback for menu translations, to avoid having to create lots of
 files that source the actual file.  E.g. menu_da_de -> menu_da
 Include part of #3242?
 
-Improvement for :terminal winpty/conpty option.  Ozaki Kiichi, #3905
-
-Patch to avoid compiler warnings. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, #3979)
-
 When a terminal exit_cb closes the window, a following typed key is lost, if
 it's in a mapping. (2018 Oct 6, #2302, #3522)
 
@@ -147,15 +143,20 @@ Should do current file first and not split it up when more results are found.
 Internal diff doesn't handle binary file like external diff does. (Mike
 Williams, 2018 Oct 30)
 
-Patch to fix that dosinstall still has buffer overflow problems. (Yasuhiro
-Matsumoto, #4002)
-
 Problem with :tlmenu: Detach item added with all modes?  Issue #3563.
 
-Patch to reduce amount of memory used by functions that keep reference.
+The quoting of the [command] argument of :terminal is not clearly documented.
-(ichizok, #3961)
+Give a few examples. (#4288)
 
-Patch to use wide font functions. (Ken Takata, 2019 Feb 18, #4000)
+Bug: script written with "-W scriptout" contains Key codes, while the script
+read with "-s scriptin" expects escape codes.  Probably "scriptout" needs to
+be adjusted. (Daniel Steinberg, 2019 Feb 24, #4041)
+
+Bug: "vipgw" does not put cursor back where it belongs. (Jason Franklin, 2019
+Mar 5)
+
+Add a way to create an empty, hidden buffer.  Like doing ":new|hide".
+":let buf = bufcreate('name')
 
 When using a timer callback vgetc_busy is reset, allowing for using input().
 But in a channel callback this does not happen.  We need to do something
@@ -170,6 +171,20 @@ Support setting the character displayed below the last line?  Neovim uses
 Check: __attribute__((format(printf, on semsg() and siemsg().  Where was this
 added?
 
+Add test for urxvt mouse codes.  Also test that mouse coordinates can be
+negative. (see #4326)
+
+'cmdheight' has a tab-local value, but it cannot be obtained with
+`:echo gettabwinvar(2, 1, '&cmdheight')` returns the value for the _current_
+tab page. (Ingo Karkat, #4324)
+:call settabwinvar(1, 1, '&cmdheight', 2) also doesn't work well.
+
+This modeline throws unexpected errors: (#4165)
+    vim: syn=nosyntax
+
+":doau SomeEvent" gives "No matching autocommands".  This message doesn't give
+a hint about how to fix it. (#4300)
+
 Make balloon_show() work outside of 'balloonexpr'?  Users expect it to work:
 #2948. (related to #1512?)
 On Win32 it stops showing, because showState is already ShS_SHOWING.
@@ -181,87 +196,56 @@ balloonexpr() on MS-Windows GUI doesn't handle accented chars? (nivaemail,
 2018 Sep 14)
 Another request: #3811.
 
-Height of quickfix window is not retained with vertical splits. (Lifepillar,
-2018 Aug 24, #2998)
-Patch on the issue by Hongbo Liu, 2019 Feb 19 #4013
-
 More warnings from static analysis:
 https://lgtm.com/projects/g/vim/vim/alerts/?mode=list
 
 Still a E315 error when using terminal. (Masato Nishihata, #3959)
 
-When using 'k' in 'guioptions' gvim may open with a tiny window. (#3808)
+Use dict_iterate_start() / dict_iterate_next() instead of relying on the
-Suggested patch on the issue.
+internals of the dict structure.
+
+Running test_gui and test_gui_init with Motif sometimes kills the window
+manager.  Problem with Motif? Now test_gui crashes in submenu_change().
+Athena is OK.
+Motif: Build on Ubuntu can't enter any text in dialog text fields.
 
 nvo-mode mapping works on Windows, not on Linux. (#3678)
 
-Patch to fix modify_fname() does not work well with some 'encoding's.
+Missing tests for:
-(Ken Takata, #4007)
+- add_termcap_entry()
-
-Patch to make vim_getenv() work with wide API. (Ken Takata, #4008)
-
-Patch to add equal field to complete items. (#3887)
 
 When using exclusive selection and vi" that fails, cursor moves to the left.
 Cursor should not move. (#4024)
 
-Patch to fix that executable() may fail on very long filename in MS-Windows.
-(Ken Takata, 2016 Feb 1, update 2018 Oct 7, update 2019 Feb 19)
-Now in pull request #4015.
-
-Patch to be able to separately map CTRL-H and BS on Windows.
-(Linwei, 2017 Jul 11, #1833)
-
-Patch to fix encoding of messages on MS-Windows. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2019 Feb
-13, #3914)
-
-Patch to fix encoding conversion in messages. (#3969)
-Check that this is fixed: (ichizok)
-vim --clean -X -V1 -es -c 'echo "hello"' -c quit
-
 Incsearch test fails when locale is "C". (Dominique Pelle, #3986)
 Also run all tests with C locale?
 
-Patch to improve readability of complicated if(). (ichizok, 2019 Jan 29,
-#3879)
-
 "vat" doesn't work well on XML when the closing > is on another line.
 #3927
 
-Patch to include ARM64 support. (Leendert van Doorn, 2019 Feb 9)
-
-Patch to fix hang when opening file where an intermediate directory is not
-readable on MS-Windows. (link on #3923)
-
 Pasting foo} causes Vim to behave weird. (John Little, 2018 Jun 17)
 Related to bracketed paste.  I cannot reproduce it.
 
-Patch to add tagfunc().  Cleaned up by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Jun 22.
-New update 2017 Apr 10, #1628
-https://github.com/chrisbra/vim-mq-patches/blob/master/tagfunc
-Updated by Andy Massimino, 2018 Feb 7:
-https://github.com/andymass/vim/commit/4e3aa0a5dab96d2799567622f3f537e357aa479e 
-Or should we make it asynchronous?
-Patch by Andy Massimino: #4010 - needs a bit more work
-
 When 'confirm' is set a "silent q" doesn't show the prompt.  It should in this
 case. (Nate Peterson, 2019 Jan 31, #3892)
 For "silent! q" it should not prompt and just fail.
 
-Patch to add readdir(). (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, #2439)
+Add <aevent>, which expands to the currently triggered autocommand event name.
+(Daniel Hahler, #4232)  Or add it to v:event (easier to use but slightly more
+expensive).
 
-Using CTRL-L to add a character to the search string doesn't work for the last
+Some xterm responses are not properly handled: (Markus Gömmel, 2019 Apr 1)
-character in the file. (Smylers, 2018 Nov 17, #3620)
+    DCS 0 $ r Pt ST    should be ignored.
-Suggested patch by Hirohito Higashi, 2018 Nov 18.
+    DCS 0 + r/Pt/  ST  already ignored?
 
 Using CTRL-L to add a character to the search string that contains \v,
 punctuation is repeated. (Smylers, 2018 Nov 17, #3621)
 
-Using CTRL-L during search only picks up the base character, not a combining
-character. (Rick, 2018 Dec 11, #3682)
-
 ml_get error: (Israel Chauca Fuentes, 2018 Oct 17, #3550).
 
+Using single wide base character with double wide composing character gives
+drawing errors.  Fill up the base character?  (Dominique, #4328)
+
 Problem with two buffers with the same name a/b, if it didn't exist before and
 is created outside of Vim. (dskloetg, 2018 Jul 16, #3219)
 
@@ -273,15 +257,6 @@ Invalid memory access with old regexp engine. (Dominique Pelle, 2018 Sep 3,
 #3405)  Introduced by 8.0.1517, which was fixing another memory access error.
 (Sep 8)
 
-Patch to add complete_mode().  Shougo - #3866.  Alternate patch by Hirohito
-Higashi, 2019 Jan 27, included now?
-
-Patch to make winnr() return the window above/below/beside a window.
-(Yegappan Lakshmanan, #3993)
-
-Patch for ConPTY support, new one: #3794 Does this work now?  It should.
-(Nobuhiro Takasaki)
-
 Add function to make use of internal diff, working on two lists and returning
 unified diff (list of lines).
 
@@ -289,33 +264,37 @@ When splitting a window with few text lines, the relative cursor position is
 kept, which means part of the text isn't displayed.  Better show all the text
 when possible. (Dylan Lloyd, #3973)
 
-Tag stack is incorrect after CTRL-T and then :tag. (Andy Massimino, 2019 Feb
-12, #3944)  With Patch for a solution.  Needs a test.
-
-Patch to implement 'diffref' option. (#3535)
-  Easier to use a 'diffmaster' option, is the extra complexity needed?
-
-Patch to fix that bracketed paste remains after Vim exits. (2018 Oct 30, #3579)
-
 Make ":interactive !cmd" stop termcap mode, also when used in an autocommand.
 (#3692)
 
-cursorline highlighting not removed after yanking in Visual mode.
-(Matéo Zanibelli, 2018 Oct 30, #3578)
-Patch by Christian, Oct 30.
-
-Patch to clean up CI configs. (Ozaki Kiichi, 2019 Feb 1, #3890)
-
-Patch to filter marks. (Marcin Szamotulski, 2019 Feb 7, #3895)
-
-Patch to add environ(), gets a dict with all environment vars, and getenv(),
-useful for environment vars that are not made of keyword chars.
-(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, #2875)
-
 Add buffer argument to undotree(). (#4001)
 
+Patch to fix that Normal is not defined when not compiled with GUI.
+(Christian Brabandt, 2019 May 7, on issue #4072)
+
 Patch to add optional arguments with default values.
-(Andy Massimino, #3952)  under development
+(Andy Massimino, #3952)  Needs to be reviewed.
+
+Patch to add more info to OptionSet.  Should mention what triggered the change
+":set", ":setlocal", ":setglobal", "modeline"; and the old global value.
+#4118.  Proposed implementation: 2019 Mar 27.
+Updated 2019 Apr 9: ASAN fails.
+
+Problem with Visual yank when 'linebreak' and 'showbreak' are set.
+Patch with tests, but it's not clear how it is supposed to work. (tommm, 2018
+Nov 17)  Asked about this, Dec 22. Christian will have a look.
+
+Patch for larger icons in installer. (#978)  Still not good.
+
+Patch to add commands to jump to quickfix entry above/below the cursor.
+(Yegappan Lakshmanan, #4316)  Also do :cbefore and :cafter.
+
+Patch to fix that using "5gj" starting inside a closed fold does not work on
+screen lines but on text lines. (Julius Hulsmann, #4095)  Lacks a test.
+
+Patch to implement 'diffref' option. (#3535)
+  Easier to use a 'diffmaster' option, is the extra complexity needed?
+  Not ready to include.
 
 Memory leaks in test_channel? (or is it because of fork())
 Using uninitialized value in test_crypt.
@@ -333,9 +312,6 @@ Memory leak in test_alot with pyeval() (allocating partial)
 
 gethostbyname() is old, use getaddrinfo() if available. (#3227)
 
-Patch to add match count and current index "3/44" when using "n" command.
-(Christian Brabandt, on issue #453).  Only when search string was typed?
-
 matchaddpos() gets slow with many matches.  Proposal by Rick Howe, 2018 Jul
 19.
 
@@ -345,6 +321,9 @@ Does #2405 do this?
 Patch to add an interrupt() function: sets got_int.  Useful in an autocommand
 such as BufWritePre that checks the file name or contents.
 
+More patches to check:
+- #4098  improve Travis config
+
 Should make 'listchars' global-local.  Local to window or to buffer?
 Probably window.
 Add something like 'fillchars' local to window, but allow for specifying a
@@ -442,9 +421,6 @@ Lemonboy can reproduce (2017 Jun 5)
 Also reproduced by Benjamin Doherty, 2018 Oct 4.
 Simpler way: Ken Takata, Oct 6.
 
-Window size is wrong when using quickfix window. (Lifepillar, 2018 Aug 24,
-#2999)
-
 Add more testing of the GTK GUI.
 - gtk_test_widget_click() can be used to simulate a click in a widget.
 
@@ -452,16 +428,16 @@ Tests failing for "make testgui" with GTK:
 - Test_setbufvar_options()
 - Test_exit_callback_interval()
 
-When using CTRL-W CR in the quickfix window, the jumplist in the opened window
-is cleared, to avoid going back to the list of errors buffer (would have two
-windows with it).  Can we just remove the jump list entries for the quickfix
-buffer?
-
 Patch to be able to use hex numbers with :digraph. (Lcd, 2015 Sep 6)
 Update Sep 7.  Update by Christian Brabandt, 2015 Sep 8, 2016 Feb 1.
 Patch to be able to disable default digraphs (incomplete) (Eric Pruitt, 2018
 Nov 22).
 
+Patch to list user digraphs. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Apr 14)
+
+Patch to add digraph() function. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 Aug 22, update Aug
+24)
+
 Try out background make plugin: 
   https://github.com/AndrewVos/vim-make-background
 or asyncmake: 
@@ -512,9 +488,6 @@ missing: --nofork, -A , -b, -h, etc.
 ":au * * command" should not be allowed, only use * for event when listing or
 deleting autocmds, not when adding them.
 
-Quickfix window height is not kept with a vertical split. (Lifepillar, 2018
-Jun 10, #2998)
-
 Alternative manpager.vim. (Enno, 2018 Jan 5, #2529)
 
 Delete all the specific stuff for the Borland compiler? (#3374)
@@ -722,10 +695,6 @@ The ++ options for the :edit command are also useful on the Vim command line.
 When recovering a file, put the swap file name in b:recovered_swapfile.  Then
 a command can delete it.
 
-When a swap file exists, is not for a running process, is from the same
-machine and recovering results in the same text, we could silently delete it.
-#1237
-
 Overlong utf-8 sequence is displayed wrong. (Harm te Hennepe, 2017 Sep 14,
 #2089)  Patch with possible solution by Björn Linse.
 
@@ -810,9 +779,6 @@ Use gvimext.dll from the nightly build? (Issue #249)
 Problem with using :cd when remotely editing a file. (Gerd Wachsmuth, 2017 May
 8, #1690)
 
-Running test_gui and test_gui_init with Motif sometimes kills the window
-manager.  Problem with Motif?
-
 Bogus characters inserted when triggering indent while changing text.
 (Vitor Antunes, 2016 Nov 22, #1269)
 
@@ -866,9 +832,6 @@ When session file has name in argument list but the buffer was deleted, the
 buffer is not deleted when using the session file. (#1393)
 Should add the buffer in hidden state.
 
-When an item in the quickfix list has a file name that does not exist, behave
-like the item was not a match for :cnext.
-
 Wrong diff highlighting with three files. (2016 Oct 20, #1186)
 Also get E749 on exit.
 Another example in #1309
@@ -974,10 +937,6 @@ Apr 23, #1653)
 Window resizing with 'winfixheight': With a vertical split the height changes
 anyway. (Tommy allen, 2017 Feb 21, #1502)
 
-When adding an item to a new quickfix list make ":cnext" jump to that item.
-Make a difference being at the first item and not having used :cnext at all.
-(Afanasiy Fet, 2017 Jan 3)
-
 Invalid behavior with NULL list. (Nikolai Pavlov, #768)
 E.g. deepcopy(test_null_list())
 
@@ -1039,6 +998,8 @@ Regexp problems:
   time is spent in addstate_here() copying the threads.  Instead of copying,
   let each thread point to the next one (by offset, the list is reallocated).
   (Dominique Pelle, 2019 Feb 18)
+- Old engine: using 'incsearch' /\Zabc does not highlight the "c" if it has a
+  composing character.  New engine is OK. (Tony Mechelynck, 2019 May 5)
 - When search pattern has the base character both with and without combining
   character, search fails.  E.g. "รรีบ" in "การรีบรักใคร". (agguser, #2312)
 - [:space:] only matches ASCII spaces.  Add [:white:] for all space-like
@@ -1168,9 +1129,6 @@ Have a way to get the call stack, in a function and from an exception.
 Second problem in #966: ins_compl_add_tv() uses get_dict_string() multiple
 times, overwrites the one buffer. (Nikolay Pavlov, 2016 Aug 5)
 
-This does not work: :set cscopequickfix=a-
-(Linewi, 2015 Jul 12, #914)
-
 Possibly wrong value for seq_cur. (Florent Fayolle, 2016 May 15, #806)
 
 Filetype plugin for awk. (Doug Kearns, 2016 Sep 5)
@@ -1771,11 +1729,6 @@ When running Vim in silent ex mode, an existing swapfile causes Vim to wait
 for a user action without a prompt. (Maarten Billemont, 2012 Feb 3)
 Do give the prompt? Quit with an error?
 
-Patch to list user digraphs. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Apr 14)
-
-Patch to add digraph() function. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 Aug 22, update Aug
-24)
-
 Patch for input method status. (Hirohito Higashi, 2012 Apr 18)
 
 Update Vim app icon (for Gnome). (Jakub Steiner, 2013 Dec 6)
@@ -2209,8 +2162,6 @@ for GTK, how about others? (Ron Aaron, 2010 Apr 10)
 
 Patch for GTK buttons X1Mouse and X2Mouse. (Christian J. Robinson, 2010 Aug 9)
 
-Motif: Build on Ubuntu can't enter any text in dialog text fields.
-
 ":tab split fname" doesn't set the alternate file in the original window,
 because win_valid() always returns FALSE.  Below win_new_tabpage() in
 ex_docmd.c.
@@ -2571,8 +2522,6 @@ Autoconf problem: when checking for iconv library we may add -L/usr/local/lib,
 but when compiling further tests -liconv is added without the -L argument,
 that may fail (e.g., sizeof(int)). (Blaine, 2007 Aug 21)
 
-When opening quickfix window, disable spell checking?
-
 Problem with ".add" files when using two languages and restarting Vim. (Raul
 Coronado, 2008 Oct 30)
 
@@ -2635,7 +2584,7 @@ Windows installer: licence text should not use indent, causes bad word wrap.
 Dos uninstal may delete vim.bat from the wrong directory (e.g., when someone
 makes his own wrapper).  Add a magic string with the version number to the
 .bat file and check for it in the uninstaller.  E.g.
-          # uninstall key: vim7.3*
+          # uninstall key: vim8.1*
 
 Changes for Win32 makefile. (Mike Williams, 2007 Jan 22, Alexei Alexandrov,
 2007 Feb 8)
@@ -2916,9 +2865,6 @@ Small problem displaying diff filler line when opening windows with a script.
 Is it allowed that 'backupext' is empty?  Problems when backup is in same dir
 as original file?  If it's OK don't compare with 'patchmode'. (Thierry Closen)
 
-Patch for supporting count before CR in quickfix window. (AOYAMA Shotaro, 2007
-Jan 1)
-
 Patch for adding ":lscscope". (Navdeep Parhar, 2007 Apr 26; update 2008 Apr
 23)
 
@@ -3071,8 +3017,6 @@ Awaiting updated patches:
 			+ 1", but that's ugly.
 7   Add patch from Benoit Cerrina to integrate Vim and Perl functions
     better.  Now also works for Ruby (2001 Nov 10)
--   Patch from Herculano de Lima Einloft Neto for better formatting of the
-    quickfix window (2004 dec 2)
 7   When 'rightleft' is set, the search pattern should be displayed right
     to left as well?  See patch of Dec 26. (Nadim Shaikli)
 8   Option to lock all used memory so that it doesn't get swapped to disk
@@ -3090,6 +3034,39 @@ Awaiting updated patches:
     and GTK by degreneir (nov 10 and nov 18).
 -   Patch for "paranoid mode" by Kevin Collins, March 7.  Needs much more work.
 
+Better 'rightleft' or BIDI support:
+- Minimal Vi with bidi support: https://github.com/aligrudi/neatvi
+  By Ali Gholami Rudi, also worked on arabic.c
+
+Quickfix/Location List:
+-   Window size is wrong when using quickfix window. (Lifepillar, 2018 Aug 24,
+    #2999)
+-   When using CTRL-W CR in the quickfix window, the jumplist in the opened
+    window is cleared, to avoid going back to the list of errors buffer (would
+    have two windows with it).  Can we just remove the jump list entries for
+    the quickfix buffer?
+-   Quickfix window height is not kept with a vertical split. (Lifepillar,
+    2018 Jun 10, #2998)
+-   When an item in the quickfix list has a file name that does not exist,
+    behave like the item was not a match for :cnext.
+-   When adding an item to a new quickfix list make ":cnext" jump to that
+    item.  Make a difference being at the first item and not having used
+    :cnext at all.  (Afanasiy Fet, 2017 Jan 3)
+-   This does not work: :set cscopequickfix=a-
+    (Linewi, 2015 Jul 12, #914)
+-   When opening quickfix window, disable spell checking?
+-   Patch for supporting count before CR in quickfix window. (AOYAMA Shotaro,
+    2007 Jan 1)
+-   Patch from Herculano de Lima Einloft Neto for better formatting of the
+    quickfix window (2004 dec 2)
+-   Amiga: When using quickfix with the Manx compiler we only get the first 25
+    errors.  How do we get the rest?
+8   The quickfix file is read without conversion, thus in 'encoding'.  Add an
+    option to specify the encoding of the errorfile and convert it.  Also for
+    ":grep" and ":helpgrep".
+    More generic solution: support a filter (e.g., by calling a function).
+7   Add a command that goes back to the position from before jumping to the
+    first quickfix location.  ":cbefore"?
 
 Vi incompatibility:
 -   Try new POSIX tests, made after my comments. (Geoff Clare, 2005 April 7)
@@ -3732,8 +3709,6 @@ Problems that will (probably) not be solved:
 -   In zsh, "gvim&" changes the terminal settings.  This is a zsh problem.
     (Jennings)
 -   Problem with HPterm under X: old contents of window is lost (Cosentino).
--   Amiga: When using quickfix with the Manx compiler we only get the first 25
-    errors.  How do we get the rest?
 -   Amiga: The ":cq" command does not always abort the Manx compiler.  Why?
 -   Linux: A file with protection r--rw-rw- is seen readonly for others.  The
     access() function in GNU libc is probably wrong.
@@ -3908,8 +3883,6 @@ Tab pages:
 8   Add local options for each tab page?  E.g., 'diffopt' could differ between
     tab pages.
 7   Add local highlighting for each tab page?
-7   Add local directory for tab pages?  How would this interfere with
-    window-local directories?
 
 
 Spell checking:
@@ -4013,7 +3986,8 @@ Folding:
     secondary: zB zS zT zZ, z=)
 8   Vertical folds: looks like vertically split windows, but the cursor moves
     through the vertical separator, separator moves when scrolling.
-8   Add "z/" and "z?" for searching in not folded text only.
+8   Add "z/" and "z?" for searching in not folded text only.  Or use a regexp
+    item, so that it can be used in any pattern.
 8   When a closed fold is displayed open because of 'foldminlines', the
     behavior of commands is still like the fold is closed.  How to make the
     user aware of this?
@@ -4066,10 +4040,6 @@ Multi-byte characters:
 8   Add an item in 'fileencodings' to check the first line of an XML file for
     the encoding.  <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>  Or "charset=UTF-8"?
     For HTML look for "charset=utf-8".
-8   The quickfix file is read without conversion, thus in 'encoding'.  Add an
-    option to specify the encoding of the errorfile and convert it.  Also for
-    ":grep" and ":helpgrep".
-    More generic solution: support a filter (e.g., by calling a function).
 8   When a file was converted from 'fileencoding' to 'encoding', a tag search
     should also do this on the search pattern. (Andrzej M. Ostruszka)
 8   When filtering changes the encoding 'fileencoding' may not work.  E.g.,
@@ -5877,8 +5847,6 @@ Various improvements:
     from the 'makeprg'?
 -   Add %b to 'errorformat': buffer number. (Yegappan Lakshmanan / Suresh
     Govindachar)
-7   Add a command that goes back to the position from before jumping to the
-    first quickfix location.  ":cbefore"?
 7   Allow a window not to have a statusline.  Makes it possible to use a
     window as a buffer-tab selection.
 8   Allow non-active windows to have a different statusline. (Yakov Lerner)
@@ -6010,7 +5978,7 @@ Various improvements:
 			used, remove the <CR> at the end of lines in [range].
 			A CTRL-Z at the end of the file is removed.  If
 			[range] is omitted, or it is the whole file, and all
-			lines end in <CR> 'textmode' is set.  {not in Vi}
+			lines end in <CR> 'textmode' is set.
 -   Should integrate addstar() and file_pat_to_reg_pat().
 -   When working over a serial line with 7 bit characters, remove meta
     characters from 'isprint'.

runtime/doc/undo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*undo.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 04
+*undo.txt*      For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -19,26 +19,24 @@ The basics are explained in section |02.5| of the user manual.
 1. Undo and redo commands				*undo-commands*
 
 <Undo>		or					*undo* *<Undo>* *u*
-u			Undo [count] changes.  {Vi: only one level}
+u			Undo [count] changes.
 
 							*:u* *:un* *:undo*
-:u[ndo]			Undo one change.  {Vi: only one level}
+:u[ndo]			Undo one change.
 								*E830*
 :u[ndo] {N}		Jump to after change number {N}.  See |undo-branches|
-			for the meaning of {N}.  {not in Vi}
+			for the meaning of {N}.
 
 							*CTRL-R*
-CTRL-R			Redo [count] changes which were undone.  {Vi: redraw
+CTRL-R			Redo [count] changes which were undone.
-			screen}
 
 							*:red* *:redo* *redo*
-:red[o]			Redo one change which was undone.  {Vi: no redo}
+:red[o]			Redo one change which was undone.
 
 							*U*
 U			Undo all latest changes on one line, the line where
 			the latest change was made. |U| itself also counts as
 			a change, and thus |U| undoes a previous |U|.
-			{Vi: while not moved off of the last modified line}
 
 The last changes are remembered.  You can use the undo and redo commands above
 to revert the text to how it was before each change.  You can also apply the
@@ -95,7 +93,6 @@ change but joins in with the previous change use this command:
 			Warning: Use with care, it may prevent the user from
 			properly undoing changes.  Don't use this after undo
 			or redo.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 This is most useful when you need to prompt the user halfway through a change.
 For example in a function that calls |getchar()|.  Do make sure that there was
@@ -151,7 +148,7 @@ This is explained in the user manual: |usr_32.txt|.
 
 							*g-*
 g-			Go to older text state.  With a count repeat that many
-			times.  {not in Vi}
+			times.
 							*:ea* *:earlier*
 :earlier {count}	Go to older text state {count} times.
 :earlier {N}s		Go to older text state about {N} seconds before.
@@ -170,7 +167,7 @@ g-			Go to older text state.  With a count repeat that many
 
 							*g+*
 g+			Go to newer text state.  With a count repeat that many
-			times.  {not in Vi}
+			times.
 							*:lat* *:later*
 :later {count}		Go to newer text state {count} times.
 :later {N}s		Go to newer text state about {N} seconds later.
@@ -280,10 +277,8 @@ respectively:
 		the existing file and then creating a new file with the same
 		name. So it is not possible to overwrite an existing undofile
 		in a write-protected directory.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 :rundo {file}	Read undo history from {file}.
-		{not in Vi}
 
 You can use these in autocommands to explicitly specify the name of the
 history file.  E.g.: >
@@ -374,10 +369,10 @@ information you can use these commands: >
 	:unlet old_undolevels
 
 Marks for the buffer ('a to 'z) are also saved and restored, together with the
-text.  {Vi does this a little bit different}
+text.
 
 When all changes have been undone, the buffer is not considered to be changed.
-It is then possible to exit Vim with ":q" instead of ":q!" {not in Vi}.  Note
+It is then possible to exit Vim with ":q" instead of ":q!".  Note
 that this is relative to the last write of the file.  Typing "u" after ":w"
 actually changes the buffer, compared to what was written, so the buffer is
 considered changed then.

runtime/doc/usr_05.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 26
+*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 27
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ will be explained though.  Use the ":help" command to find out more.
 >
 	" Get the defaults that most users want.
 	source $VIMRUNTIME/defaults.vim
->
+
 This loads the "defaults.vim" file in the $VIMRUNTIME directory.  This sets up
 Vim for how most users like it.  If you are one of the few that don't, then
 comment out this line.  The commands are explained below:
@@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ The following explains what defaults.vim is doing.
 	if exists('skip_defaults_vim')
 	  finish
 	endif
->
+
 Loading defaults.vim can be disabled with this command: >
 	let skip_defaults_vim = 1
 This has to be done in the system vimrc file.  See |system-vimrc|.  If you
 have a user vimrc this is not needed, since defaults.vim will not be loaded
 automatically.
->
+
 >
 	set nocompatible
 
@@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ character before where Insert mode started.  See 'backspace'.
 
 Keep 200 commands and 200 search patterns in the history.  Use another number
 if you want to remember fewer or more lines.  See 'history'.
->
 
+>
 	set ruler
 
 Always display the current cursor position in the lower right corner of the
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ will not need it.
 
 >
 	inoremap <C-U> <C-G>u<C-U>
->
+
 CTRL-U in insert mode deletes all entered text in the current line.  Use
 CTRL-G u to first break undo, so that you can undo CTRL-U after inserting a
 line break.  Revert with ":iunmap <C-U>".
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ typing commands at the command-line.
 		  \ | wincmd p | diffthis
 
 This adds the ":DiffOrig" command.  Use this in a modified buffer to see the
-differences with the file it was loaded from.  See |diff|.
+differences with the file it was loaded from.  See |diff| and |:DiffOrig|.
 
 >
 	set nolangremap

runtime/doc/usr_11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_11.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 04
+*usr_11.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Apr 28
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -205,6 +205,13 @@ something wrong.  It may be one of these two situations.
       NEWER than swap file! ~
 
 
+NOTE that in the following situation Vim knows the swap file is not useful and
+will automatically delete it:
+- The file is a valid swap file (Magic number is correct).
+- The flag that the file was modified is not set.
+- The process is not running.
+
+
 UNREADABLE SWAP FILE
 
 Sometimes the line

runtime/doc/usr_21.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2012 Nov 02
+*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Apr 25
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -263,7 +263,8 @@ well stand for "source").
 The windows that were open are restored, with the same position and size as
 before.  Mappings and option values are like before.
    What exactly is restored depends on the 'sessionoptions' option.  The
-default value is "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,options,winsize".
+default value is:
+"blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,options,tabpages,winsize,terminal".
 
 	blank		keep empty windows
 	buffers		all buffers, not only the ones in a window
@@ -271,7 +272,9 @@ default value is "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,options,winsize".
 	folds		folds, also manually created ones
 	help		the help window
 	options		all options and mappings
+	tabpages	all tab pages
 	winsize		window sizes
+	terminal	include terminal windows
 
 Change this to your liking.  To also restore the size of the Vim window, for
 example, use: >

runtime/doc/usr_22.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_22.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2016 Dec 13
+*usr_22.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Apr 27
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -202,14 +202,28 @@ the other window.  This is called a local directory. >
 	:pwd
 	/home/Bram/VeryLongFileName
 
-So long as no ":lcd" command has been used, all windows share the same current
+So long as no `:lcd` command has been used, all windows share the same current
-directory.  Doing a ":cd" command in one window will also change the current
+directory.  Doing a `:cd` command in one window will also change the current
 directory of the other window.
-   For a window where ":lcd" has been used a different current directory is
+   For a window where `:lcd` has been used a different current directory is
-remembered.  Using ":cd" or ":lcd" in other windows will not change it.
+remembered.  Using `:cd` or `:lcd` in other windows will not change it.
-   When using a ":cd" command in a window that uses a different current
+   When using a `:cd` command in a window that uses a different current
 directory, it will go back to using the shared directory.
 
+
+TAB LOCAL DIRECTORY
+
+When you open a new tab page, it uses the directory of the window in the
+previous tab page from which the new tab page was opened. You can change the
+directory of the current tab page using the `:tcd` command. All the windows in
+a tab page share this directory except for windows with a window-local
+directory. Any new windows opened in this tab page will use this directory as
+the current working directory. Using a `:cd` command in a tab page will not
+change the working directory of tab pages which have a tab local directory.
+When the global working directory is changed using the ":cd" command in a tab
+page, it will also change the current tab page working directory.
+
+
 ==============================================================================
 *22.3*	Finding a file
 

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 29
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 09
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -577,8 +577,10 @@ used for.  You can find an alphabetical list here: |functions|.  Use CTRL-] on
 the function name to jump to detailed help on it.
 
 String manipulation:					*string-functions*
-	nr2char()		get a character by its ASCII value
+	nr2char()		get a character by its number value
-	char2nr()		get ASCII value of a character
+	list2str()		get a character string from a list of numbers
+	char2nr()		get number value of a character
+	str2list()		get list of numbers from a string
 	str2nr()		convert a string to a Number
 	str2float()		convert a string to a Float
 	printf()		format a string according to % items
@@ -723,6 +725,8 @@ Cursor and mark position:		*cursor-functions* *mark-functions*
 	diff_filler()		get the number of filler lines above a line
 	screenattr()		get attribute at a screen line/row
 	screenchar()		get character code at a screen line/row
+	screenchars()		get character codes at a screen line/row
+	screenstring()		get string of characters at a screen line/row
 
 Working with text in the current buffer:		*text-functions*
 	getline()		get a line or list of lines from the buffer
@@ -762,15 +766,20 @@ System functions and manipulation of files:
 	isdirectory()		check if a directory exists
 	getfsize()		get the size of a file
 	getcwd()		get the current working directory
-	haslocaldir()		check if current window used |:lcd|
+	haslocaldir()		check if current window used |:lcd| or |:tcd|
 	tempname()		get the name of a temporary file
 	mkdir()			create a new directory
+	chdir()			change current working directory
 	delete()		delete a file
 	rename()		rename a file
 	system()		get the result of a shell command as a string
 	systemlist()		get the result of a shell command as a list
+	environ()		get all environment variables
+	getenv()		get one environment variable
+	setenv()		set an environment variable
 	hostname()		name of the system
 	readfile()		read a file into a List of lines
+	readdir()		get a List of file names in a directory
 	writefile()		write a List of lines or Blob into a file
 
 Date and Time:				*date-functions* *time-functions*
@@ -803,6 +812,8 @@ Buffers, windows and the argument list:
 	setbufline()		replace a line in the specified buffer
 	appendbufline()		append a list of lines in the specified buffer
 	deletebufline()		delete lines from a specified buffer
+	listener_add()		add a callback to listen to changes
+	listener_remove()	remove a listener callback
 	win_findbuf()		find windows containing a buffer
 	win_getid()		get window ID of a window
 	win_gotoid()		go to window with ID
@@ -834,6 +845,7 @@ Insert mode completion:				*completion-functions*
 	complete()		set found matches
 	complete_add()		add to found matches
 	complete_check()	check if completion should be aborted
+	complete_info()		get current completion information
 	pumvisible()		check if the popup menu is displayed
 
 Folding:					*folding-functions*
@@ -896,6 +908,7 @@ GUI:						*gui-functions*
 	getwinposy()		Y position of the Vim window
 	balloon_show()		set the balloon content
 	balloon_split()		split a message for a balloon
+	balloon_gettext()	get the text in the balloon
 
 Vim server:					*server-functions*
 	serverlist()		return the list of server names
@@ -949,6 +962,7 @@ Testing:				    *test-functions*
 	test_null_partial()	return a null Partial function
 	test_null_string()	return a null String
 	test_settime()		set the time Vim uses internally
+	test_setmouse()		set the mouse position
 	test_feedinput()	add key sequence to input buffer
 	test_option_not_set()	reset flag indicating option was set
 	test_scrollbar()	simulate scrollbar movement in the GUI

runtime/doc/usr_90.txt

@@ -281,9 +281,8 @@ unpacked them.
 In case you are not satisfied with the features included in the supplied
 binaries, you could try compiling Vim yourself.  Get the source archive from
 the same location as where the binaries are.  You need a compiler for which a
-makefile exists.  Microsoft Visual C works, but is expensive.  The Free
+makefile exists.  Microsoft Visual C works, but is expensive.  The free MinGW
-Borland command-line compiler 5.5 can be used, as well as the free MingW and
+and Cygwin compilers can be used.  Check the file src/INSTALLpc.txt for hints.
-Cygwin compilers.  Check the file src/INSTALLpc.txt for hints.
 
 ==============================================================================
 *90.3*	Upgrading

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Jan 17
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -73,8 +73,6 @@ ga			Print the ascii value of the character under the
 			    <ö> 246, Hex 00f6, Oct 366, Digr o: ~
 			This shows you can type CTRL-K o : to insert ö.
 
-			{not in Vi}
-
 							*g8*
 g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			character under the cursor, assuming it is in |UTF-8|
@@ -82,7 +80,6 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			value of 'maxcombine' doesn't matter.
 			Example of a character with two composing characters:
 				e0 b8 81 + e0 b8 b9 + e0 b9 89 ~
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*8g8*
 8g8			Find an illegal UTF-8 byte sequence at or after the
@@ -97,7 +94,6 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			Note that when the cursor is on an illegal byte or the
 			cursor is halfway a multi-byte character the command
 			won't move the cursor.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 						*:p* *:pr* *:print* *E749*
 :[range]p[rint] [flags]
@@ -174,7 +170,6 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 
 :{range}z#[+-^.=]{count}				*:z#*
 			Like ":z", but number the lines.
-			{not in all versions of Vi, not with these arguments}
 
 							*:=*
 := [flags]		Print the last line number.
@@ -224,7 +219,6 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 
 			Example: >
 				:exe "normal \<c-w>\<c-w>"
-<			{not in Vi, of course}
 
 :{range}norm[al][!] {commands}				*:normal-range*
 			Execute Normal mode commands {commands} for each line
@@ -232,7 +226,6 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			cursor is positioned in the first column of the range,
 			for each line.  Otherwise it's the same as the
 			":normal" command without a range.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:sh* *:shell* *E371*
 :sh[ell]		This command starts a shell.  When the shell exits
@@ -443,7 +436,7 @@ N  *+syntax*		Syntax highlighting |syntax|
    *+system()*		Unix only: opposite of |+fork|
 T  *+tag_binary*	binary searching in tags file |tag-binary-search|
 N  *+tag_old_static*	old method for static tags |tag-old-static|
-m  *+tag_any_white*	any white space allowed in tags file |tag-any-white|
+m  *+tag_any_white*	Removed; was to allow any white space in tags files
 m  *+tcl*		Tcl interface |tcl|
 m  *+tcl/dyn*		Tcl interface |tcl-dynamic| |/dyn|
 m  *+terminal*		Support for terminal window |terminal|
@@ -456,7 +449,8 @@ N  *+textprop*		|text-properties|
 N  *+timers*		the |timer_start()| function
 N  *+title*		Setting the window 'title' and 'icon'
 N  *+toolbar*		|gui-toolbar|
-N  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|
+T  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|
+			Always enabled since 8.1.1210.
 B  *+vartabs*		Variable-width tabstops. |'vartabstop'|
 N  *+viminfo*		|'viminfo'|
    *+vertsplit*		Vertically split windows |:vsplit|; Always enabled
@@ -489,7 +483,7 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 :ve[rsion] {nr}		Is now ignored.  This was previously used to check the
 			version number of a .vimrc file.  It was removed,
 			because you can now use the ":if" command for
-			version-dependent behavior.  {not in Vi}
+			version-dependent behavior.
 
 							*:redi* *:redir*
 :redi[r][!] > {file}	Redirect messages to file {file}.  The messages which
@@ -509,31 +503,28 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 			with ":silent call Function()".
 			An alternative is to use the 'verbosefile' option,
 			this can be used in combination with ":redir".
-			{not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] >> {file}	Redirect messages to file {file}.  Append if {file}
-			already exists.  {not in Vi}
+			already exists.
 
 :redi[r] @{a-zA-Z}
 :redi[r] @{a-zA-Z}>	Redirect messages to register {a-z}.  Append to the
 			contents of the register if its name is given
 			uppercase {A-Z}.  The ">" after the register name is
-			optional. {not in Vi}
+			optional.
-:redi[r] @{a-z}>>	Append messages to register {a-z}. {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] @{a-z}>>	Append messages to register {a-z}.
 
 :redi[r] @*>		
 :redi[r] @+>		Redirect messages to the selection or clipboard. For
 			backward compatibility, the ">" after the register
 			name can be omitted. See |quotestar| and |quoteplus|.
-			{not in Vi}
 :redi[r] @*>>		
 :redi[r] @+>>		Append messages to the selection or clipboard.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] @">		Redirect messages to the unnamed register. For
 			backward compatibility, the ">" after the register
-			name can be omitted. {not in Vi}
+			name can be omitted.
-:redi[r] @">>		Append messages to the unnamed register. {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] @">>		Append messages to the unnamed register.
 
 :redi[r] => {var}	Redirect messages to a variable.  If the variable
 			doesn't exist, then it is created.  If the variable
@@ -542,14 +533,14 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 			Only string variables can be used.  After the
 			redirection starts, if the variable is removed or
 			locked or the variable type is changed, then further
-			command output messages will cause errors. {not in Vi}
+			command output messages will cause errors.
 			To get the output of one command the |execute()|
 			function can be used.
 
 :redi[r] =>> {var}	Append messages to an existing variable.  Only string
-			variables can be used. {not in Vi}
+			variables can be used.
 
-:redi[r] END		End redirecting messages.  {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] END		End redirecting messages.
 
 							*:filt* *:filter*
 :filt[er][!] {pat} {command}
@@ -570,17 +561,19 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 			the output, not necessarily the whole line. Only some
 			commands support filtering, try it out to check if it
 			works. Some of the commands that support filtering:
-                          |:#|          - filter whole line
+			   |:#|          - filter whole line
-                          |:command|    - filter by command name
+			   |:clist|      - filter by file name or module name
-                          |:files|      - filter by file name
+			   |:command|    - filter by command name
-                          |:highlight|  - filter by highlight group
+			   |:files|      - filter by file name
-                          |:jumps|      - filter by file name
+			   |:highlight|  - filter by highlight group
-                          |:let|        - filter by variable name
+			   |:jumps|      - filter by file name
-                          |:list|       - filter whole line
+			   |:let|        - filter by variable name
-                          |:llist|      - filter by file name or module name
+			   |:list|       - filter whole line
-                          |:oldfiles|   - filter by file name
+			   |:llist|      - filter by file name or module name
-                          |:clist|      - filter by file name or module name
+			   |:marks|      - filter by text in the current file,
-                          |:set|        - filter by variable name
+					   or file name for other files
+			   |:oldfiles|   - filter by file name
+			   |:set|        - filter by variable name
 
 			Only normal messages are filtered, error messages are
 			not.
@@ -689,12 +682,11 @@ K			Run a program to lookup the keyword under the
 <			- When 'keywordprg' is equal to "man -s", a count
 			  before "K" is inserted after the "-s".  If there is
 			  no count, the "-s" is removed.
-			{not in Vi}
 
 							*v_K*
 {Visual}K		Like "K", but use the visually highlighted text for
 			the keyword.  Only works when the highlighted text is
-			not more than one line.  {not in Vi}
+			not more than one line.
 
 [N]gs							*gs* *:sl* *:sleep*
 :[N]sl[eep] [N]	[m]	Do nothing for [N] seconds.  When [m] is included,
@@ -707,11 +699,26 @@ K			Run a program to lookup the keyword under the
 <			Can be interrupted with CTRL-C (CTRL-Break on MS-DOS).
 			"gs" stands for "goto sleep".
 			While sleeping the cursor is positioned in the text,
-			if at a visible position.  {not in Vi}
+			if at a visible position.
 			Also process the received netbeans messages. {only
 			available when compiled with the |+netbeans_intg|
 			feature}
 
+							*:xrestore* *:xr*
+:xr[estore] [display]	Reinitializes the connection to the X11 server. Useful
+			after the X server restarts, e.g. when running Vim for
+			long time inside screen/tmux and connecting from
+			different machines).
+			[display] should be in the format of the $DISPLAY 
+			environment variable (e.g. "localhost:10.0")
+			If [display] is	omitted, then it reinitializes the
+			connection to the X11 server using the same value as
+			was used for the previous execution of this command.
+			If the value was never specified, then it uses the
+			value of $DISPLAY environment variable as it was when
+			Vim was started.
+			{only available when compiled with the |+clipboard| 
+			feature}
 
 							*g_CTRL-A*
 g CTRL-A		Only when Vim was compiled with MEM_PROFILING defined

runtime/doc/version8.txt

@@ -2378,7 +2378,7 @@ Solution:   Use the msgfmt command found by configure. (Danek Duvall)
 Files:	    src/config.mk.in, src/po/Makefile
 
 Patch 7.4.323
-Problem:    Substitute() with zero width pattern breaks multi-byte character.
+Problem:    substitute() with zero width pattern breaks multi-byte character.
 Solution:   Take multi-byte character size into account. (Yukihiro Nakadaira)
 Files:	    src/eval.c src/testdir/test69.in, src/testdir/test69.ok
 
@@ -20311,7 +20311,7 @@ Solution:   Use R for a running job and F for a finished job.
 Files:      src/buffer.c
 
 Patch 8.0.0936
-Problem:    Mode() returns wrong value for a terminal window.
+Problem:    mode() returns wrong value for a terminal window.
 Solution:   Return 't' when typed keys go to a job.
 Files:      src/evalfunc.c, src/testdir/test_terminal.vim
 
@@ -20697,7 +20697,7 @@ Solution:   Add type cast. (Mike Williams)
 Files:      src/channel.c
 
 Patch 8.0.1004
-Problem:    Matchstrpos() without a match returns too many items.
+Problem:    matchstrpos() without a match returns too many items.
 Solution:   Also remove the second item when the position is beyond the end of
             the string. (Hirohito Higashi)  Use an enum for the type.
 Files:      src/evalfunc.c, src/testdir/test_match.vim
@@ -22544,7 +22544,7 @@ Files:      src/ex_getln.c, src/proto/search.pro, src/search.c,
             src/testdir/test_search.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.1305
-Problem:    Writefile() never calls fsync().
+Problem:    writefile() never calls fsync().
 Solution:   Follow the 'fsync' option with override to enable or disable.
 Files:      src/fileio.c, src/evalfunc.c, runtime/doc/eval.txt, src/globals.h,
             src/testdir/test_writefile.vim
@@ -22732,7 +22732,7 @@ Solution:   Take the winbar into account when computing the new window
 Files:      src/vim.h, src/window.c
 
 Patch 8.0.1335
-Problem:    Writefile() using fsync() may give an error for a device.
+Problem:    writefile() using fsync() may give an error for a device.
             (Yasuhiro Matsumoto)
 Solution:   Ignore fsync() failing. (closes #2373)
 Files:      src/evalfunc.c
@@ -23618,7 +23618,7 @@ Files:      src/edit.c, src/testdir/test_ins_complete.vim,
             src/testdir/test_popup.vim, src/testdir/test_edit.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.1483
-Problem:    Searchpair() might return an invalid value on timeout.
+Problem:    searchpair() might return an invalid value on timeout.
 Solution:   When the second search times out, do not accept a match from the
             first search. (Daniel Hahler, closes #2552)
 Files:      src/search.c
@@ -23722,7 +23722,7 @@ Files:      runtime/doc/eval.txt, runtime/doc/usr_41.txt, src/Makefile,
             src/testdir/Make_all.mak, src/testdir/test_jumplist.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.1498 (after 8.0.1497)
-Problem:    Getjumplist() returns duplicate entries. (lacygoill)
+Problem:    getjumplist() returns duplicate entries. (lacygoill)
 Solution:   Call cleanup_jumplist(). (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
 Files:      src/evalfunc.c, src/mark.c, src/proto/mark.pro,
             src/testdir/test_jumplist.vim
@@ -23842,7 +23842,7 @@ Solution:   Restore emsg_silent before executing :try. (closes #2531)
 Files:      src/ex_docmd.c, src/testdir/test_eval_stuff.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.1519
-Problem:    Getchangelist() does not use argument as bufname().
+Problem:    getchangelist() does not use argument as bufname().
 Solution:   Use get_buf_tv(). (Yegappan Lakshmanan, closes #2641)
 Files:      src/evalfunc.c, src/testdir/test_changelist.vim
 

runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2016 Aug 16
+*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -6,9 +6,8 @@
 
 Differences between Vim and Vi				*vi-differences*
 
-Throughout the help files differences between Vim and Vi/Ex are given in
+This file lists the differences between Vim and Vi/Ex and gives an overview of
-curly braces, like "{not in Vi}".  This file only lists what has not been
+what is in Vim that is not in Vi.
-mentioned in other files and gives an overview.
 
 Vim is mostly POSIX 1003.2-1 compliant.  The only command known to be missing
 is ":open".  There are probably a lot of small differences (either because Vim
@@ -19,8 +18,9 @@ is missing something or because Posix is beside the mark).
 3. Limits				|limits|
 4. The most interesting additions	|vim-additions|
 5. Other vim features			|other-features|
-6. Command-line arguments		|cmdline-arguments|
+6. Supported Vi features		|vi-features|
-7. POSIX compliance			|posix-compliance|
+7. Command-line arguments		|cmdline-arguments|
+8. POSIX compliance			|posix-compliance|
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Simulated command					*simulated-command*
@@ -179,6 +179,10 @@ Multiple windows and buffers.				|windows.txt|
 	line with tab labels can be used to quickly switch between these pages.
 	|tab-page|
 
+Terminal window.					|:terminal|
+	Vim can create a window in which a terminal emulator runs.  This can
+	be used to execute an arbitrary command, a shell or a debugger.
+
 Syntax highlighting.					|:syntax|
 	Vim can highlight keywords, patterns and other things.  This is
 	defined by a number of |:syntax| commands, and can be made to
@@ -193,6 +197,11 @@ Syntax highlighting.					|:syntax|
 	|'hlsearch'|, matching parens |matchparen| and the cursor line and
 	column |'cursorline'| |'cursorcolumn'|.
 
+Text properties						|textprop.txt|
+	Vim supports highlighting text by a plugin.  Property types can be
+	specificed with |prop_type_add()| and properties can be placed with
+	|prop_add()|.
+
 Spell checking.						|spell|
 	When the 'spell' option is set Vim will highlight spelling mistakes.
 	About 50 languages are currently supported, selected with the
@@ -261,6 +270,8 @@ Visual mode.						|Visual-mode|
 		~	swap case
 		u	make lowercase
 		U	make uppercase
+	{Vi has no Visual mode, the name "visual" is used for Normal mode, to
+	distinguish it from Ex mode}
 
 Block operators.					|visual-block|
 	With Visual mode a rectangular block of text can be selected.  Start
@@ -282,6 +293,12 @@ Command-line editing and history.			|cmdline-editing|
 	forward/backward one character.  The shifted right/left cursor keys
 	can be used to move forward/backward one word.  CTRL-B/CTRL-E can be
 	used to go to the begin/end of the command-line.
+	{Vi: can only alter the last character in the line}
+	{Vi: when hitting <Esc> the command-line is executed.  This is
+	unexpected for most people; therefore it was changed in Vim.  But when
+	the <Esc> is part of a mapping, the command-line is executed.  If you
+	want the Vi behaviour also when typing <Esc>, use ":cmap ^V<Esc>
+	^V^M"}
 							|cmdline-history|
 	The command-lines are remembered.  The up/down cursor keys can be used
 	to recall previous command-lines.  The 'history' option can be set to
@@ -521,10 +538,16 @@ With the CTRL-] command, the cursor may be in the middle of the identifier.
 The used tags are remembered.  Commands that can be used with the tag stack
 are CTRL-T, ":pop" and ":tag".  ":tags" lists the tag stack.
 
+Vi uses 'wrapscan' when searching for a tag.  When jumping to a tag Vi starts
+searching in line 2 of another file.  It does not find a tag in line 1 of
+another file when 'wrapscan' is not set.
+
 The 'tags' option can be set to a list of tag file names.  Thus multiple
 tag files can be used.  For file names that start with "./", the "./" is
 replaced with the path of the current file.  This makes it possible to use a
 tags file in the same directory as the file being edited.
+{Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
+{Vi does not have the security prevention for commands in tag files}
 
 Previously used file names are remembered in the alternate file name list.
 CTRL-^ accepts a count, which is an index in this list.
@@ -562,6 +585,8 @@ one space after a period (Vi inserts two spaces).
 
 "cw" can be used to change white space formed by several characters (Vi is
 confusing: "cw" only changes one space, while "dw" deletes all white space).
+{Vi: "cw" when on a blank followed by other blanks changes only the first
+blank; this is probably a bug, because "dw" deletes all the blanks}
 
 "o" and "O" accept a count for repeating the insert (Vi clears a part of
 display).
@@ -630,7 +655,7 @@ of the window.
 Uppercase marks can be used to jump between files.  The ":marks" command lists
 all currently set marks.  The commands "']" and "`]" jump to the end of the
 previous operator or end of the text inserted with the put command.  "'[" and
-"`[" do jump to the start.
+"`[" do jump to the start. {Vi: no uppercase marks}
 
 The 'shelltype' option can be set to reflect the type of shell used on the
 Amiga.
@@ -775,19 +800,331 @@ filesystem under Unix.  See |'shortname'|.
 Error messages are shown at least one second (Vi overwrites error messages).
 
 If Vim gives the |hit-enter| prompt, you can hit any key.  Characters other
-than <CR>, <NL> and <Space> are interpreted as the (start of) a command.  (Vi
+than <CR>, <NL> and <Space> are interpreted as the (start of) a command.
-only accepts a command starting with ':').
+{Vi: only ":" commands are interpreted}
 
 The contents of the numbered and unnamed registers is remembered when
 changing files.
 
 The "No lines in buffer" message is a normal message instead of an error
 message, since that may cause a mapping to be aborted.
+{Vi: error messages may be overwritten with other messages before you have a
+chance to read them}
 
 The AUX: device of the Amiga is supported.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Command-line arguments				*cmdline-arguments*
+6. Supported Vi features				*vi-features*
+
+Vim supports nearly all Vi commands and mostly in the same way.  That is when
+the 'compatible' option is set and 'cpoptions' contains all flags.  What the
+effect is of resetting 'compatible' and removing flags from 'cpoptions' can be
+found at the help for the specific command.
+
+The help files used to mark features that are in Vim but not in Vi with {not
+in Vi}.  However, since these remarks cluttered the help files we now do it
+the other way around: Below is listed what Vi already supported.  Anything
+else has been added by Vim.
+
+
+The following Ex commands are supported by Vi: ~
+
+`:abbreviate`	enter abbreviation
+`:append`	append text
+`:args`		print the argument list
+`:cd`		change directory; Vi: no "cd -"
+`:change`	replace a line or series of lines
+`:chdir`	change directory
+`:copy`		copy lines
+`:delete`	delete lines
+`:edit`		edit a file
+`:exit`		same as `:xit`
+`:file`		show or set the current file name; Vi: without the column number
+`:global`	execute commands for matching lines
+`:insert`	insert text
+`:join`		join lines; Vi: not :join!
+`:k`		set a mark
+`:list`		print lines
+`:map`		show or enter a mapping
+`:mark`		set a mark
+`:move`		move lines
+`:Next`		go to previous file in the argument list {Vi: no count}
+`:next`		go to next file in the argument list {Vi: no count}
+`:number`	print lines with line number
+`:open`		start open mode (not implemented in Vim)
+`:pop`		jump to older entry in tag stack (only in some versions)
+`:preserve`	write all text to swap file {Vi: might also exit}
+`:previous`	same as `:Next` {Vi: only in some versions}
+`:print`	print lines
+`:put`		insert contents of register in the text
+`:quit`		quit Vi
+`:read`		read file into the text
+`:recover`	recover a file from a swap file {Vi: recovers in another way
+		and sends mail if there is something to recover}
+`:rewind`	go to the first file in the argument list; no ++opt
+`:set`		set option; but not `:set inv{option}`, `:set option&`,
+		`:set all&`, `:set option+=value`, `:set option^=value`
+		`:set option-=value` `:set option<`
+`:shell`	escape to a shell
+`:source`	read Vim or Ex commands from a file
+`:stop`		suspend the editor or escape to a shell
+`:substitute`	find and replace text; Vi: no '&', 'i', 's', 'r' or 'I' flag,
+		confirm prompt only supports 'y' and 'n', no highlighting
+`:suspend`	same as ":stop"
+`:t`		same as ":copy"
+`:tag`		jump to tag
+`:unabbreviate`	remove abbreviation
+`:undo`		undo last change {Vi: only one level}
+`:unmap`	remove mapping
+`:vglobal`	execute commands for not matching lines
+`:version`	print version number and other info
+`:visual`	same as ":edit", but turns off "Ex" mode
+`:wq`		write to a file and quit Vi
+`:write`	write to a file
+`:xit`		write if buffer changed and quit Vi
+`:yank`		yank lines into a register
+`:z`		print some lines {not in all versions of Vi}
+`:!`		filter lines or execute an external command
+`:"`		comment
+`:#`		same as ":number"
+`:*`		execute contents of a register
+`:&`		repeat last ":substitute"
+`:<`		shift lines one 'shiftwidth' left
+`:=`		print the cursor line number
+`:>`		shift lines one 'shiftwidth' right
+`:@`		execute contents of a register; but not `:@`; `:@@` only in
+		some versions
+
+Common for these commands is that Vi doesn't support the ++opt argument on
+`:edit` and other commands that open a file.
+
+
+The following Normal mode commands are supported by Vi: ~
+
+|CTRL-B|	scroll N screens Backwards
+|CTRL-C|	interrupt current (search) command
+|CTRL-D|	scroll Down N lines (default: half a screen); Vim scrolls
+		'scroll' screen lines, Vi scrolls file lines; makes a
+		difference when lines wrap
+|CTRL-E|	scroll N lines upwards (N lines Extra)
+|CTRL-F|	scroll N screens Forward
+|CTRL-G|	display current file name and position
+|<BS>|		same as "h"
+|CTRL-H|	same as "h"
+|<NL>|		same as "j"
+|CTRL-J|	same as "j"
+|CTRL-L|	redraw screen
+|<CR>|		cursor to the first CHAR N lines lower
+|CTRL-M|	same as <CR>
+|CTRL-N|	same as "j"
+|CTRL-P|	same as "k"
+|CTRL-R|	in some Vi versions: same as CTRL-L
+|CTRL-T|	jump to N older Tag in tag list
+|CTRL-U|	N lines Upwards (default: half a screen)
+|CTRL-Y|	scroll N lines downwards
+|CTRL-Z|	suspend program (or start new shell)
+|CTRL-]|	:ta to ident under cursor {Vi: identifier after the cursor}
+|CTRL-^|	edit alternate file {Vi: no count}
+|<Space>|	same as "l"
+|!|		filter Nmove text through the {filter} command
+|!!|		filter N lines through the {filter} command
+"		use register {a-zA-Z0-9.%#:-"} for next delete, yank or put
+		(uppercase to append) ({.%#:} only work with put)
+|$|		cursor to the end of Nth next line
+|%|		find the next (curly/square) bracket on this line and go to
+		its match, or go to matching comment bracket, or go to
+		matching preprocessor directive (Vi: no count supported)
+|&|		repeat last :s
+|'|		jump to mark (Vi: only lowercase marks)
+|(|		cursor N sentences backward
+|)|		cursor N sentences forward
+|+|		same as <CR>
+|,|		repeat latest f, t, F or T in opposite direction N times
+|-|		cursor to the first CHAR N lines higher
+|.|		repeat last change with count replaced with N
+|/|		search forward for the Nth occurrence of {pattern}
+|0|		cursor to the first char of the line
+|:|		start entering an Ex command
+|;|		repeat latest f, t, F or T N times
+|<|		shift Nmove lines one 'shiftwidth' leftwards
+|<<|		shift N lines one 'shiftwidth' leftwards
+|=|		filter Nmove lines through "indent"
+|==|		filter N lines through "indent"
+|>|		shift Nmove lines one 'shiftwidth' rightwards
+|>>|		shift N lines one 'shiftwidth' rightwards
+|?|		search backward for the Nth previous occurrence of {pattern}
+|@|		execute the contents of register {a-z} N times
+		{Vi: only named registers}
+|@@|		repeat the previous @{a-z} N times
+|A|		append text after the end of the line N times
+|B|		cursor N WORDS backward
+|C|		change from the cursor position to the end of the line
+|D|		delete the characters under the cursor until the end of the
+		line and N-1 more lines [into register x]; synonym for "d$"
+|E|		cursor forward to the end of WORD N
+|F|		cursor to the Nth occurrence of {char} to the left
+|G|		cursor to line N, default last line
+|H|		cursor to line N from top of screen
+|I|		insert text before the first CHAR on the line N times
+|J|		Join N lines; default is 2
+|L|		cursor to line N from bottom of screen
+|M|		cursor to middle line of screen
+|N|		repeat the latest '/' or '?' N times in opposite direction
+|O|		begin a new line above the cursor and insert text, repeat N
+		times {Vi: blank [count] screen lines}
+|P|		put the text [from register x] before the cursor N times
+		{Vi: no count}
+|Q|		switch to "Ex" mode
+|R|		enter replace mode: overtype existing characters, repeat the
+		entered text N-1 times
+|S|		delete N lines [into register x] and start insert; synonym for
+		"cc".
+|T|		cursor till after Nth occurrence of {char} to the left
+|U|		undo all latest changes on one line
+		{Vi: while not moved off of the last modified line}
+|W|		cursor N WORDS forward
+|X|		delete N characters before the cursor [into register x]
+|Y|		yank N lines [into register x]; synonym for "yy"
+|ZZ|		store current file if modified, and exit
+|[[|		cursor N sections backward
+|]]|		cursor N sections forward
+|^|		cursor to the first CHAR of the line
+|_|		cursor to the first CHAR N - 1 lines lower
+|`|		cursor to the mark {a-zA-Z0-9}
+|a|		append text after the cursor N times
+|b|		cursor N words backward
+|c|		delete Nmove text [into register x] and start insert
+|cc|		delete N lines [into register x] and start insert
+|d|		delete Nmove text [into register x]
+|dd|		delete N lines [into register x]
+|e|		cursor forward to the end of word N
+|f|		cursor to Nth occurrence of {char} to the right
+|h|		cursor N chars to the left
+|i|		insert text before the cursor N times
+|j|		cursor N lines downward
+|k|		cursor N lines upward
+|l|		cursor N chars to the right
+|m|		set mark {A-Za-z} at cursor position
+|n|		repeat the latest '/' or '?' N times
+|o|		begin a new line below the cursor and insert text
+		{Vi: blank [count] screen lines}
+|p|		put the text [from register x] after the cursor N times
+		{Vi: no count}
+|r|		replace N chars with {char} {Vi: CTRL-V <CR> still replaces
+		with a line break, cannot replace something with a <CR>}
+|s|		(substitute) delete N characters [into register x] and start
+		insert
+|t|		cursor till before Nth occurrence of {char} to the right
+|u|		undo changes {Vi: only one level}
+|w|		cursor N words forward
+|x|		delete N characters under and after the cursor [into register
+		x]
+|y|		yank Nmove text [into register x]
+|yy|		yank N lines [into register x]
+|z<CR>|		current line to the top
+|z-|		current line to the bottom
+|z+|		cursor on line N
+|z^|		cursor on line N
+|{|		cursor N paragraphs backward
+|		cursor to column N
+|}|		cursor N paragraphs forward
+|~|		switch case of N characters under the cursor; Vim: depends on
+		'tildeop' {Vi: no count, no 'tildeop'}
+|<Del>|		same as "x"
+
+
+The following commands are supported in Insert mode by Vi: ~
+
+CTRL-@		insert previously inserted text and stop insert
+		{Vi: only when typed as first char, only up to 128 chars}
+CTRL-C		quit insert mode, without checking for abbreviation, unless
+		'insertmode' set.
+CTRL-D		delete one shiftwidth of indent in the current line
+		{Vi: CTRL-D works only when used after autoindent}
+<BS>		delete character before the cursor {Vi: does not delete
+		autoindents, does not cross lines, does not delete past start
+		position of insert}
+CTRL-H		same as <BS>
+<Tab>		insert a <Tab> character
+CTRL-I		same as <Tab>
+<NL>		same as <CR>
+CTRL-J		same as <CR>
+<CR>		begin new line
+CTRL-M		same as <CR>
+CTRL-T		insert one shiftwidth of indent in current line {Vi: only when
+		in indent}
+CTRL-V {char}	insert next non-digit literally {Vi: no decimal byte entry}
+CTRL-W		delete word before the cursor
+CTRL-Z		when 'insertmode' set: suspend Vim
+<Esc>		end insert mode (unless 'insertmode' set)
+CTRL-[		same as <Esc>
+0 CTRL-D	delete all indent in the current line
+^ CTRL-D	delete all indent in the current line, restore it in the next
+		line
+<Del>		delete character under the cursor
+
+
+The following options are supported by Vi: ~
+
+'autoindent'	  'ai'	    take indent for new line from previous line
+			    {Vi does this slightly differently: After the
+			    indent is deleted when typing <Esc> or <CR>, the
+			    cursor position when moving up or down is after
+			    the deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere
+			    in the deleted indent}.
+'autowrite'	  'aw'	    automatically write file if changed
+'directory'	  'dir'     list of directory names for the swap file
+			    {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to
+			    "/tmp"}
+'edcompatible'	  'ed'	    toggle flags of ":substitute" command
+'errorbells'	  'eb'	    ring the bell for error messages
+'ignorecase'	  'ic'	    ignore case in search patterns
+'lines'			    number of lines in the display
+'lisp'			    automatic indenting for Lisp {Vi: Does it a little
+			    bit differently}
+'list'			    show <Tab> and <EOL>
+'magic'			    changes special characters in search patterns
+'modeline'	  'ml'	    recognize 'modelines' at start or end of file
+				{called modelines in some Vi versions}
+'number'	  'nu'	    print the line number in front of each line
+'paragraphs'	  'para'    nroff macros that separate paragraphs
+'prompt'	  'prompt'  enable prompt in Ex mode
+'readonly'	  'ro'	    disallow writing the buffer {Vim sets 'readonly'
+				when editing a file with `:view`}
+'remap'			    allow mappings to work recursively
+'report'		    threshold for reporting nr. of lines changed
+'scroll'	  'scr'     lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D
+'sections'	  'sect'    nroff macros that separate sections
+'shell'		  'sh'	    name of shell to use for external commands
+'shiftwidth'	  'sw'	    number of spaces to use for (auto)indent step
+'showmatch'	  'sm'	    briefly jump to matching bracket if insert one
+'showmode'	  'smd'     message on status line to show current mode
+'tabstop'	  'ts'	    number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses
+'taglength'	  'tl'	    number of significant characters for a tag
+'tags'		  'tag'     list of file names used by the tag command
+			    {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}
+'tagstack'	  'tgst'    push tags onto the tag stack {not in all versions
+				of Vi}
+'term'			    name of the terminal
+'terse'			    shorten some messages
+'timeout'	  'to'	    time out on mappings and key codes
+'timeoutlen'	  'tm'	    time for 'timeout' {only in some Vi versions}
+'ttytype'	  'tty'     alias for 'term'
+'verbose'	  'vbs'     give informative messages {only in some Vi
+				versions as a boolean option}
+'warn'			    warn for shell command when buffer was changed
+'window'	  'wi'	    nr of lines to scroll for CTRL-F and CTRL-B
+			    {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of
+			    displayed lines}
+'wrapmargin'	  'wm'	    chars from the right where wrapping starts
+			    {Vi: works differently and less usefully}
+'wrapscan'	  'ws'	    searches wrap around the end of the file
+'writeany'	  'wa'	    write to file with no need for "!" override
+
+Also see |missing-options|.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Command-line arguments				*cmdline-arguments*
 
 Different versions of Vi have different command-line arguments.  This can be
 confusing.  To help you, this section gives an overview of the differences.
@@ -894,7 +1231,8 @@ Only Vim is able to accept options in between and after the file names.
 -i		Elvis: Start each window in Insert mode.
 -i {viminfo}	Vim: Use {viminfo} for viminfo file.
 
--L		Vim: Same as "-r" (also in some versions of Vi).
+-L		Vim: Same as "-r" {only in some versions of Vi: "List
+		recoverable edit sessions"}.
 
 -l		Nvi, Vi, Vim: Set 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options.
 
@@ -967,7 +1305,7 @@ Only Vim is able to accept options in between and after the file names.
 @{cmdfile}	Vile: use {cmdfile} as startup file.
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. POSIX compliance				*posix* *posix-compliance*
+8. POSIX compliance				*posix* *posix-compliance*
 
 In 2005 the POSIX test suite was run to check the compatibility of Vim.  Most
 of the test was executed properly.  There are the few things where Vim

runtime/doc/visual.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*visual.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 19
+*visual.txt*    For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ This is introduced in section |04.4| of the user manual.
 7. Examples				|visual-examples|
 8. Select mode				|Select-mode|
 
-{Vi has no Visual mode, the name "visual" is used for Normal mode, to
-distinguish it from Ex mode}
 {Since Vim 7.4.200 the |+visual| feature is always included}
 
 ==============================================================================
@@ -118,7 +116,7 @@ gn			Search forward for the last used search pattern, like
 			E.g., "dgn" deletes the text of the next match.
 			If Visual mode is active, extends the selection
 			until the end of the next match.
-			Note: Unlinke `n` the search direction does not depend
+			Note: Unlike `n` the search direction does not depend
 			on the previous search command.
 
 								*gN* *v_gN*

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2018 Apr 24
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 May 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -26,7 +26,6 @@ The basics are explained in chapter 7 and 8 of the user manual |usr_07.txt|
 11. Using hidden buffers			|buffer-hidden|
 12. Special kinds of buffers			|special-buffers|
 
-{Vi does not have any of these commands}
 {not able to use multiple windows when the |+windows| feature was disabled at
 compile time}
 {not able to use vertically split windows when the |+vertsplit| feature was
@@ -737,7 +736,7 @@ can also get to them with the buffer list commands, like ":bnext".
 			the current window.
 			{cmd} can contain '|' to concatenate several commands.
 			{cmd} must not open or close windows or reorder them.
-			{not in Vi}
+
 			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
 			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
@@ -765,7 +764,7 @@ can also get to them with the buffer list commands, like ":bnext".
 			autocommand event is disabled by adding it to
 			'eventignore'.  This considerably speeds up editing
 			each buffer.
-			{not in Vi}
+
 			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:windo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
 			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
@@ -842,6 +841,12 @@ CTRL-W gF						*CTRL-W_gF*
 		{not available when the |+file_in_path| feature was disabled
 		at compile time}
 
+CTRL-W gt						*CTRL-W_gt*
+		Go to next tab page, same as `gt`.
+
+CTRL-W gT						*CTRL-W_gT*
+		Go to previous tab page, same as `gT`.
+
 Also see |CTRL-W_CTRL-I|: open window for an included file that includes
 the keyword under the cursor.
 
@@ -885,7 +890,7 @@ CTRL-W CTRL-Z					*CTRL-W_CTRL-Z* *:pc* *:pclose*
 							*:pp* *:ppop*
 :[count]pp[op][!]
 		Does ":[count]pop[!]" in the preview window.  See |:pop| and
-		|:ptag|.  {not in Vi}
+		|:ptag|.
 
 CTRL-W }						*CTRL-W_}*
 		Use identifier under cursor as a tag and perform a :ptag on

runtime/filetype.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to detect file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2019 Feb 07
+" Last Change:	2019 May 06
 
 " Listen very carefully, I will say this only once
 if exists("did_load_filetypes")
@@ -42,6 +42,8 @@ endif
 
 " Function used for patterns that end in a star: don't set the filetype if the
 " file name matches ft_ignore_pat.
+" When using this, the entry should probably be further down below with the
+" other StarSetf() calls.
 func! s:StarSetf(ft)
   if expand("<amatch>") !~ g:ft_ignore_pat
     exe 'setf ' . a:ft
@@ -95,9 +97,6 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead build.xml			setf ant
 " Arduino
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ino,*.pde		setf arduino
 
-" Apache style config file
-au BufNewFile,BufRead proftpd.conf*		call s:StarSetf('apachestyle')
-
 " Apache config file
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .htaccess,*/etc/httpd/*.conf		setf apache
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/apache2/sites-*/*.com		setf apache
@@ -655,7 +654,6 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead gnashrc,.gnashrc,gnashpluginrc,.gnashpluginrc setf gnash
 
 " Gitolite
 au BufNewFile,BufRead gitolite.conf		setf gitolite
-au BufNewFile,BufRead */gitolite-admin/conf/*	call s:StarSetf('gitolite')
 au BufNewFile,BufRead {,.}gitolite.rc,example.gitolite.rc	setf perl
 
 " Gnuplot scripts
@@ -715,8 +713,8 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.erb,*.rhtml		setf eruby
 " HTML with M4
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.html.m4			setf htmlm4
 
-" HTML Cheetah template
+" Some template.  Used to be HTML Cheetah.
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.tmpl			setf htmlcheetah
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.tmpl			setf template
 
 " Host config
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/host.conf		setf hostconf
@@ -804,7 +802,6 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.jsp			setf jsp
 
 " Java Properties resource file (note: doesn't catch font.properties.pl)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.properties,*.properties_??,*.properties_??_??	setf jproperties
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.properties_??_??_*	call s:StarSetf('jproperties')
 
 " Jess
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.clp			setf jess
@@ -1177,6 +1174,10 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rcp			setf pilrc
 " Pine config
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .pinerc,pinerc,.pinercex,pinercex		setf pine
 
+" Pipenv Pipfiles
+au BufNewFile,BufRead Pipfile			setf config
+au BufNewFile,BufRead Pipfile.lock		setf json
+
 " PL/1, PL/I
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pli,*.pl1		setf pli
 
@@ -1462,7 +1463,6 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.decl,*.dcl,*.dec
 
 " SGML catalog file
 au BufNewFile,BufRead catalog			setf catalog
-au BufNewFile,BufRead sgml.catalog*		call s:StarSetf('catalog')
 
 " Shell scripts (sh, ksh, bash, bash2, csh); Allow .profile_foo etc.
 " Gentoo ebuilds and Arch Linux PKGBUILDs are actually bash scripts
@@ -1617,6 +1617,10 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/sysctl.conf,*/etc/sysctl.d/*.conf	setf sysctl
 
 " Systemd unit files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */systemd/*.{automount,mount,path,service,socket,swap,target,timer}	setf systemd
+" Systemd overrides
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/systemd/system/*.d/*.conf	setf systemd
+" Systemd temp files
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/systemd/system/*.d/.#*	setf systemd
 
 " Synopsys Design Constraints
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sdc			setf sdc
@@ -1699,6 +1703,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.tsscl		setf tsscl
 " TWIG files
 au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.twig		setf twig
 
+" Typescript
+au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.ts			setf typescript
+
 " Motif UIT/UIL files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.uit,*.uil		setf uil
 
@@ -1739,7 +1746,6 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sv,*.svh		setf systemverilog
 
 " VHDL
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.hdl,*.vhd,*.vhdl,*.vbe,*.vst  setf vhdl
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vhdl_[0-9]*		call s:StarSetf('vhdl')
 
 " Vim script
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vim,*.vba,.exrc,_exrc	setf vim
@@ -1861,7 +1867,8 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xmi			setf xml
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.csproj,*.csproj.user	setf xml
 
 " Qt Linguist translation source and Qt User Interface Files are XML
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ts,*.ui			setf xml
+" However, for .ts Typescript is more common.
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ui			setf xml
 
 " TPM's are RDF-based descriptions of TeX packages (Nikolai Weibull)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.tpm			setf xml
@@ -1952,6 +1959,7 @@ au StdinReadPost * if !did_filetype() | runtime! scripts.vim | endif
 
 " More Apache style config files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/proftpd/*.conf*,*/etc/proftpd/conf.*/*	call s:StarSetf('apachestyle')
+au BufNewFile,BufRead proftpd.conf*					call s:StarSetf('apachestyle')
 
 " More Apache config files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead access.conf*,apache.conf*,apache2.conf*,httpd.conf*,srm.conf*	call s:StarSetf('apache')
@@ -2008,6 +2016,12 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *fvwm2rc*
 " Gedcom
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */tmp/lltmp*		call s:StarSetf('gedcom')
 
+" Git
+au BufNewFile,BufRead */.gitconfig.d/*,/etc/gitconfig.d/* 	call s:StarSetf('gitconfig')
+
+" Gitolite
+au BufNewFile,BufRead */gitolite-admin/conf/*	call s:StarSetf('gitolite')
+
 " GTK RC
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .gtkrc*,gtkrc*		call s:StarSetf('gtkrc')
 
@@ -2020,6 +2034,9 @@ au! BufNewFile,BufRead *jarg*
 	\|  call s:StarSetf('jargon')
 	\|endif
 
+" Java Properties resource file (note: doesn't catch font.properties.pl)
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.properties_??_??_*	call s:StarSetf('jproperties')
+
 " Kconfig
 au BufNewFile,BufRead Kconfig.*			call s:StarSetf('kconfig')
 
@@ -2081,6 +2098,9 @@ au BufRead,BufNewFile *.rdf			call dist#ft#Redif()
 " Remind
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .reminders*		call s:StarSetf('remind')
 
+" SGML catalog file
+au BufNewFile,BufRead sgml.catalog*		call s:StarSetf('catalog')
+
 " Shell scripts ending in a star
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .bashrc*,.bash[_-]profile*,.bash[_-]logout*,.bash[_-]aliases*,bash-fc[-.]*,,PKGBUILD* call dist#ft#SetFileTypeSH("bash")
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .kshrc* call dist#ft#SetFileTypeSH("ksh")
@@ -2092,6 +2112,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead .tcshrc*	call dist#ft#SetFileTypeShell("tcsh")
 " csh scripts ending in a star
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .login*,.cshrc*  call dist#ft#CSH()
 
+" VHDL
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vhdl_[0-9]*		call s:StarSetf('vhdl')
+
 " Vim script
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *vimrc*			call s:StarSetf('vim')
 

runtime/ftplugin/cobol.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	cobol
-" Author:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.info>
+" Maintainer: Ankit Jain <ajatkj@yahoo.co.in>
-" Last Update:	By ZyX: use shiftwidth()
+"     (formerly Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.info>)
+" Last Update:	By Ankit Jain (changed maintainer) on 22.03.2019
 
 " Insert mode mappings: <C-T> <C-D> <Tab>
 " Normal mode mappings: < > << >> [[ ]] [] ][

runtime/ftplugin/dosbatch.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:    MS-DOS .bat files
 " Maintainer:  Mike Williams <mrw@eandem.co.uk>
-" Last Change: 8th May 2012
+" Last Change: 14th April 2019
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ set cpo&vim
 
 " BAT comment formatting
 setlocal comments=b:rem,b:@rem,b:REM,b:@REM,:::
+setlocal commentstring=::\ %s
 setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=rol
 
 " Define patterns for the browse file filter

runtime/ftplugin/make.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	Make
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2013 Apr 22
+" Last Change:	2019 Apr 02
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ setlocal commentstring=#\ %s
 " Including files.
 let &l:include = '^\s*include'
 
-" For matchit.vim, suggested by Albert Netymk.
+" For matchit.vim, suggested by Albert Netymk and Ken Takata.
 if exists("loaded_matchit")
-  let b:match_words = '\<if\(n\)\=\(eq\|def\)\>:\<else\>:\<endif\>,\<define\>:\<endef\>'
+  let b:match_words = '^ *ifn\=\(eq\|def\)\>:^ *else\(\s\+ifn\=\(eq\|def\)\)\=\>:^ *endif\>,\<define\>:\<endef\>,^!\s*if\(n\=def\)\=\>:^!\s*else\(if\(n\=def\)\=\)\=\>:^!\s*endif\>'
 endif

runtime/ftplugin/nroff.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin
+" Language:	roff(7)
+" Maintainer:	Chris Spiegel <cspiegel@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	2019 Apr 24
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+setlocal commentstring=.\\\"%s

runtime/ftplugin/ocaml.vim

@@ -372,8 +372,8 @@ endfunction
   endfun
 
   " This variable contain a dictionnary of list. Each element of the dictionnary
-  " represent an annotation system. An annotation system is a list with :
+  " represent an annotation system. An annotation system is a list with:
-  " - annotation file name as it's key
+  " - annotation file name as its key
   " - annotation file path as first element of the contained list
   " - build path as second element of the contained list
   " - annot_file_last_mod (contain the date of .annot file) as third element

runtime/ftplugin/python.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:	Tom Picton <tom@tompicton.co.uk>
 " Previous Maintainer: James Sully <sullyj3@gmail.com>
 " Previous Maintainer: Johannes Zellner <johannes@zellner.org>
-" Last Change:	Sun, 15 April 2018
+" Last Change:	Sun 17 Mar 2019
 " https://github.com/tpict/vim-ftplugin-python
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
@@ -37,9 +37,10 @@ setlocal suffixesadd=.py
 setlocal comments=b:#,fb:-
 setlocal commentstring=#\ %s
 
-setlocal omnifunc=pythoncomplete#Complete
 if has('python3')
-       setlocal omnifunc=python3complete#Complete
+  setlocal omnifunc=python3complete#Complete 
+elseif has('python')
+  setlocal omnifunc=pythoncomplete#Complete
 endif
 
 set wildignore+=*.pyc
@@ -53,32 +54,34 @@ let b:prev='\v^\s*(class\|def\|async def)>'
 let b:next_end='\v\S\n*(%$\|^(\s*\n*)*(class\|def\|async def)\|^\S)'
 let b:prev_end='\v\S\n*(^(\s*\n*)*(class\|def\|async def)\|^\S)'
 
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next_toplevel."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
+if !exists('g:no_plugin_maps') && !exists('g:no_python_maps')
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev_toplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next_toplevel."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ][ :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next_endtoplevel."', 'W', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev_toplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [] :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev_endtoplevel."', 'Wb', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ][ :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next_endtoplevel."', 'W', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [] :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev_endtoplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]M :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next_end."', 'W', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [M :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev_end."', 'Wb', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]M :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:next_end."', 'W', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
+    execute "nnoremap <silent> <buffer> [M :call <SID>Python_jump('n', '". b:prev_end."', 'Wb', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
 
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next_toplevel."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next_toplevel."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev_toplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev_toplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ][ :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next_endtoplevel."', 'W', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ][ :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next_endtoplevel."', 'W', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [] :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev_endtoplevel."', 'Wb', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [] :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev_endtoplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ]M :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next_end."', 'W', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> ]M :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:next_end."', 'W', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [M :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev_end."', 'Wb', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "onoremap <silent> <buffer> [M :call <SID>Python_jump('o', '". b:prev_end."', 'Wb', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
 
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next_toplevel."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]] :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next_toplevel."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev_toplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [[ :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev_toplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ][ :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next_endtoplevel."', 'W', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ][ :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next_endtoplevel."', 'W', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [] :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev_endtoplevel."', 'Wb', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [] :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev_endtoplevel."', 'Wb', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]m :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next."', 'W', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [m :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev."', 'Wb', v:count1)<cr>"
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]M :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next_end."', 'W', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> ]M :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:next_end."', 'W', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
-execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [M :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev_end."', 'Wb', 0, v:count1)<cr>"
+    execute "xnoremap <silent> <buffer> [M :call <SID>Python_jump('x', '". b:prev_end."', 'Wb', v:count1, 0)<cr>"
+endif
 
 if !exists('*<SID>Python_jump')
   fun! <SID>Python_jump(mode, motion, flags, count, ...) range
@@ -123,10 +126,80 @@ if !exists('g:pydoc_executable')
         let g:pydoc_executable = 0
     endif
 endif
+
+" Windows-specific pydoc setup
+if has('win32') || has('win64')
+    if executable('python')
+        " available as Tools\scripts\pydoc.py
+        let g:pydoc_executable = 1
+    else
+        let g:pydoc_executable = 0
+    endif
+endif
+
 " If "pydoc" was found use it for keywordprg.
 if g:pydoc_executable
-    setlocal keywordprg=pydoc
+    if has('win32') || has('win64')
+        setlocal keywordprg=python\ -m\ pydoc\ 
+    else
+        setlocal keywordprg=pydoc
+    endif
 endif
 
+" Script for filetype switching to undo the local stuff we may have changed
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal cinkeys<'
+      \ . '|setlocal comments<'
+      \ . '|setlocal commentstring<'
+      \ . '|setlocal expandtab<'
+      \ . '|setlocal include<'
+      \ . '|setlocal includeexpr<'
+      \ . '|setlocal indentkeys<'
+      \ . '|setlocal keywordprg<'
+      \ . '|setlocal omnifunc<'
+      \ . '|setlocal shiftwidth<'
+      \ . '|setlocal softtabstop<'
+      \ . '|setlocal suffixesadd<'
+      \ . '|setlocal tabstop<'
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> [M'
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> [['
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> []'
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> [m'
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> ]M'
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> ]['
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> ]]'
+      \ . '|silent! nunmap <buffer> ]m'
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> [M'
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> [['
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> []'
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> [m'
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> ]M'
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> ]['
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> ]]'
+      \ . '|silent! ounmap <buffer> ]m'
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> [M'
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> [['
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> []'
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> [m'
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> ]M'
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> ]['
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> ]]'
+      \ . '|silent! xunmap <buffer> ]m'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:browsefilter'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:child_match'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:child_sub'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:grandparent_match'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:grandparent_sub'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:next'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:next_end'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:next_endtoplevel'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:next_toplevel'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:parent_match'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:parent_sub'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:prev'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:prev_end'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:prev_endtoplevel'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:prev_toplevel'
+      \ . '|unlet! b:undo_ftplugin'
+
 let &cpo = s:keepcpo
 unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/ftplugin/sql.vim

@@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ endif
 
 " Predefined SQL objects what are used by the below mappings using
 " the ]} style maps.
-" This global variable allows the users to override it's value
+" This global variable allows the users to override its value
 " from within their vimrc.
 " Note, you cannot use \?, since these patterns can be used to search
 " backwards, you must use \{,1}
@@ -486,10 +486,10 @@ if exists('&omnifunc')
     " OMNI function prior to setting up the SQL OMNI function
     let b:sql_compl_savefunc = &omnifunc
 
-    " Source it to determine it's version
+    " Source it to determine its version
     runtime autoload/sqlcomplete.vim
     " This is used by the sqlcomplete.vim plugin
-    " Source it for it's global functions
+    " Source it for its global functions
     runtime autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim
 
     setlocal omnifunc=sqlcomplete#Complete

runtime/gvim.desktop

@@ -1,12 +1,24 @@
+# The gvim.desktop file is generated by src/po/Makefile, do NOT edit.
+# Edit the src/po/gvim.desktop.in file instead.
 [Desktop Entry]
-Name=gVim
+# Translators: This is the Application Name used in the GVim desktop file
-GenericName=Text Editor
+Name[de]=GVim
-GenericName[da]=Teksteditor
+Name=GVim
+# Translators: This is the Generic Application Name used in the Vim desktop file
 GenericName[de]=Texteditor
+GenericName[ja]=テキストエディタ
+GenericName=Text Editor
+# Translators: This is the comment used in the Vim desktop file
+Comment[de]=Textdateien bearbeiten
+Comment[ja]=テキストファイルを編集します
+Comment=Edit text files
+# The translations should come from the po file. Leave them here for now, they will
+# be overwritten by the po file when generating the desktop.file!
+GenericName[da]=Teksteditor
 GenericName[eo]=Tekstoredaktilo
 GenericName[fr]=Éditeur de texte
 GenericName[pl]=Edytor tekstu
-Comment=Edit text files
+GenericName[is]=Ritvinnsluforrit
 Comment[af]=Redigeer tekslêers
 Comment[am]=የጽሑፍ ፋይሎች ያስተካክሉ
 Comment[ar]=حرّر ملفات نصية
@@ -19,7 +31,6 @@ Comment[ca]=Edita fitxers de text
 Comment[cs]=Úprava textových souborů
 Comment[cy]=Golygu ffeiliau testun
 Comment[da]=Rediger tekstfiler
-Comment[de]=Textdateien bearbeiten
 Comment[el]=Επεξεργασία αρχείων κειμένου
 Comment[en_CA]=Edit text files
 Comment[en_GB]=Edit text files
@@ -37,8 +48,8 @@ Comment[hi]=पाठ फ़ाइलें संपादित करें
 Comment[hr]=Uređivanje tekstualne datoteke
 Comment[hu]=Szövegfájlok szerkesztése
 Comment[id]=Edit file teks
+Comment[is]=Vinna með textaskrár
 Comment[it]=Modifica file di testo
-Comment[ja]=テキストファイルを編集します
 Comment[kn]=ಪಠ್ಯ ಕಡತಗಳನ್ನು ಸಂಪಾದಿಸು
 Comment[ko]=텍스트 파일을 편집합니다
 Comment[lt]=Redaguoti tekstines bylas
@@ -79,7 +90,12 @@ TryExec=gvim
 Exec=gvim -f %F
 Terminal=false
 Type=Application
+# Translators: Search terms to find this application. Do NOT change the semicolons! The list MUST also end with a semicolon!
+Keywords[de]=Text;Editor;
+Keywords[ja]=テキスト;エディタ;
 Keywords=Text;editor;
+# Translators: This is the Icon file name. Do NOT translate
+Icon[de]=gvim
 Icon=gvim
 Categories=Utility;TextEditor;
 StartupNotify=true

runtime/indent/Makefile

@@ -11,4 +11,4 @@ test:
 
 
 clean:
-	VIMRUNTIME=$(VIMRUNTIME) $(VIM) --clean --not-a-term -u testdir/cleantest.vim
+	rm -f testdir/*.fail testdir/*.out

runtime/indent/awk.vim

@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ endif
 
 function! GetAwkIndent()
 
-   " Find previous line and get it's indentation
+   " Find previous line and get its indentation
    let prev_lineno = s:Get_prev_line( v:lnum )
    if prev_lineno == 0
       return 0

runtime/indent/cobol.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,12 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	cobol
-" Author:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.info>
+" Maintainer: Ankit Jain <ajatkj@yahoo.co.in>
+"     (formerly Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.info>)
 " $Id: cobol.vim,v 1.1 2007/05/05 18:08:19 vimboss Exp $
+" Last Update:	By Ankit Jain on 22.03.2019
+" Ankit Jain      22.03.2019     Changes & fixes:
+"                                Allow chars in 1st 6 columns
+"                                #C22032019
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
     finish
@@ -66,7 +71,9 @@ function! GetCobolIndent(lnum) abort
     let ashft = minshft + 1
     let bshft = ashft + 4
     " (Obsolete) numbered lines
-    if getline(a:lnum) =~? '^\s*\d\{6\}\%($\|[ */$CD-]\)'
+    " #C22032019: Columns 1-6 could have alphabets as well as numbers
+    "if getline(a:lnum) =~? '^\s*\d\{6\}\%($\|[ */$CD-]\)'
+    if getline(a:lnum) =~? '^\s*[a-zA-Z0-9]\{6\}\%($\|[ */$CD-]\)'
         return 0
     endif
     let cline = s:stripped(a:lnum)

runtime/indent/html.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Header: "{{{
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar
 " Original Author: Andy Wokula <anwoku@yahoo.de>
-" Last Change:	2018 Mar 28
+" Last Change:	2019 Mar 20
 " Version:	1.0
 " Description:	HTML indent script with cached state for faster indenting on a
 "		range of lines.
@@ -902,12 +902,19 @@ func! s:InsideTag(foundHtmlString)
   "{{{
   if a:foundHtmlString
     " Inside an attribute string.
-    " Align with the previous line or use an external function.
+    " Align with the opening quote or use an external function.
     let lnum = v:lnum - 1
     if lnum > 1
       if exists('b:html_indent_tag_string_func')
         return b:html_indent_tag_string_func(lnum)
       endif
+      " If there is a double quote in the previous line, indent with the
+      " character after it.
+      if getline(lnum) =~ '"'
+	call cursor(lnum, 0)
+	normal f"
+	return virtcol('.')
+      endif
       return indent(lnum)
     endif
   endif